M38033F8L-XXXWG [RENESAS]

SINGLE-CHIP 8-BIT CMOS MICROCOMPUTER; 单片8位CMOS微机
M38033F8L-XXXWG
型号: M38033F8L-XXXWG
厂家: RENESAS TECHNOLOGY CORP    RENESAS TECHNOLOGY CORP
描述:

SINGLE-CHIP 8-BIT CMOS MICROCOMPUTER
单片8位CMOS微机

计算机
文件: 总119页 (文件大小:1620K)
中文:  中文翻译
下载:  下载PDF数据表文档文件
3803 Group (Spec.L)  
SINGLE-CHIP 8-BIT CMOS MICROCOMPUTER  
REJ03B0212-0100  
Rev.1.00  
Apr 2, 2007  
DESCRIPTION  
• Power source voltage (Flash memory version)  
[In high-speed mode]  
At 16.8 MHz oscillation frequency.................... 4.5 to 5.5 V  
At 12.5 MHz oscillation frequency.................... 4.0 to 5.5 V  
At 8.4 MHz oscillation frequency...................... 2.7 to 5.5 V  
[In middle-speed mode]  
At 16.8 MHz oscillation frequency.................... 4.5 to 5.5 V  
At 12.5 MHz oscillation frequency.................... 2.7 to 5.5 V  
[In low-speed mode]  
The 3803 group (Spec.L) is the 8-bit microcomputer based on the  
740 family core technology.  
The 3803 group (Spec.L) is designed for household products,  
office automation equipment, and controlling systems that  
require analog signal processing, including the A/D converter  
and D/A converters.  
FEATURES  
• Basic machine-language instructions ................................. 71  
• Minimum instruction execution time .......................... 0.24 µs  
(at 16.8 MHz oscillation frequency)  
At 32 kHz oscillation frequency......................... 2.7 to 5.5 V  
• Power dissipation (Mask ROM version)  
In high-speed mode ........................................... 40 mW (typ.)  
(at 16.8 MHz oscillation frequency, at 5 V power source voltage)  
In low-speed mode ............................................ 45 µW (typ.)  
(at 32 kHz oscillation frequency, at 3 V power source voltage)  
• Power dissipation (Flash memory version)  
In high-speed mode ........................................ 27.5 mW (typ.)  
(at 16.8 MHz oscillation frequency, at 5 V power source voltage)  
In low-speed mode ........................................ 1200 µW (typ.)  
(at 32 kHz oscillation frequency, at 3 V power source voltage)  
• Operating temperature range ............................. 20 to 85 °C  
• Packages  
• Memory size  
Mask ROM/Flash memory .................................... 60 K bytes  
RAM ...................................................................... 2048 bytes  
• Programmable input/output ports ....................................... 56  
• Software pull-up resistors............................................ Built-in  
• Interrupts  
21 sources, 16 vectors...............................................................  
(external 8, internal 12, software 1)  
• Timers ...................................................................... 16-bit × 1  
8-bit × 4  
(with 8-bit prescaler)  
SP...............PRDP0064BA-A (64P4B) (64-pin 750 mil SDIP)  
HP ......PLQP0064KB-A (64P6Q-A) (64-pin 10 × 10 mm LQFP)  
KP ......PLQP0064GA-A (64P6U-A) (64-pin 14 × 14 mm LQFP)  
WG ........PTLG0064JA-A (64F0G) (64-pin 6 × 6 mm FLGA)  
• Serial interface.........8-bit × 2 (UART or Clock-synchronized)  
8-bit × 1 (Clock-synchronized)  
• PWM ....................................... 8-bit × 1 (with 8-bit prescaler)  
• A/D converter ........................................ 10-bit × 16 channels  
(8-bit reading enabled)  
<Flash memory mode>  
• D/A converter ............................................ 8-bit × 2 channels  
• Watchdog timer ...................................................... 16-bit × 1  
• LED direct drive port..............................................................8  
• Clock generating circuit ............................. Built-in 2 circuits  
(connect to external ceramic resonator or quartz-crystal oscillator)  
• Power source voltage (Mask ROM version)  
[In high-speed mode]  
• Power source voltage ................................ VCC = 2.7 to 5.5 V  
• Program/Erase voltage ............................. VCC = 2.7 to 5.5 V  
• Programming method ............... Programming in unit of byte  
• Erasing method ................................................. Block erasing  
• Program/Erase control by software command  
• Number of times for programming/erasing ...................... 100  
At 16.8 MHz oscillation frequency ....................4.5 to 5.5 V  
At 12.5 MHz oscillation frequency ....................4.0 to 5.5 V  
At 8.4 MHz oscillation frequency ......................2.7 to 5.5 V  
At 4.2 MHz oscillation frequency ......................2.2 to 5.5 V  
At 2.1 MHz oscillation frequency ......................2.0 to 5.5 V  
[In middle-speed mode]  
<Notes>  
The flash memory version cannot be used for application  
embedded in the MCU card.  
At 16.8 MHz oscillation frequency ....................4.5 to 5.5 V  
At 12.5 MHz oscillation frequency ....................2.7 to 5.5 V  
At 8.4 MHz oscillation frequency ......................2.2 to 5.5 V  
At 6.3 MHz oscillation frequency ......................1.8 to 5.5 V  
[In low-speed mode]  
At 32 kHz oscillation frequency.........................1.8 to 5.5 V  
Rev.1.00 Apr 2, 2007  
REJ03B0212-0100  
Page 1 of 117  
3803 Group (Spec.L)  
P37/SRDY3  
P36/SCLK3  
P35/TXD3  
P34/RXD3  
P33  
49  
50  
51  
52  
53  
54  
55  
56  
57  
58  
59  
60  
61  
62  
63  
64  
32  
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
18  
17  
P20(LED0)  
P21(LED1)  
P22(LED2)  
P23(LED3)  
P24(LED4)  
P25(LED5)  
P26(LED6)  
P27(LED7)  
VSS  
P32  
P31/DA2  
P30/DA1  
VCC  
M38039MFL-XXXHP/KP  
M38039FFLHP/KP  
VREF  
XOUT  
AVSS  
XIN  
P67/AN7  
P66/AN6  
P65/AN5  
P64/AN4  
P63/AN3  
P40/INT40/XCOUT  
P41/INT00/XCIN  
RESET  
CNVSS  
P42/INT1  
Package code : PLQP0064KB-A (64P6Q-A)/PLQP0064GA-A (64P6U-A)  
Fig 1. Pin configuration (Top view) PLQP0064KB-A (64P6Q-A)/PLQP0064GA-A (64P6U-A)  
VCC  
VREF  
AVSS  
P67/AN7  
P66/AN6  
P65/AN5  
P64/AN4  
P63/AN3  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
64  
63  
62  
61  
60  
59  
58  
57  
56  
55  
54  
53  
52  
51  
50  
49  
48  
47  
46  
45  
44  
43  
42  
41  
40  
39  
38  
37  
36  
35  
34  
33  
P30/DA1  
P31/DA2  
P32  
P33  
P34/RXD3  
P35/TXD3  
P36/SCLK3  
P37/SRDY3  
P00/AN8  
P01/AN9  
P02/AN10  
P03/AN11  
P04/AN12  
P05/AN13  
P06/AN14  
P07/AN15  
P10/INT41  
P11/INT01  
P12  
P62/AN2  
P61/AN1  
P60/AN0  
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
P57/INT3  
P56/PWM  
P55/CNTR1  
P54/CNTR0  
P53/SRDY2  
P52/SCLK2  
P51/SOUT2  
P50/SIN2  
P47/SRDY1/CNTR2  
P46/SCLK1  
P45/TXD1  
P44/RXD1  
P43/INT2  
P42/INT1  
CNVSS  
P13  
P14  
P15  
P16  
P17  
P20(LED0)  
P21(LED1)  
P22(LED2)  
P23(LED3)  
P24(LED4)  
P25(LED5)  
P26(LED6)  
P27(LED7)  
RESET  
P41/INT00/XCIN  
P40/INT40/XCOUT  
XIN  
XOUT  
VSS  
Package code : PRDP0064BA-A (64P4B)  
Fig 2. Pin configuration (Top view) (PRDP0064BA-A (64P4B))  
Rev.1.00 Apr 2, 2007  
REJ03B0212-0100  
Page 2 of 117  
3803 Group (Spec.L)  
PIN CONFIGURATION (TOP VIEW)  
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
50  
46  
44  
41  
40  
32  
31  
30  
8
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
P36/SCLK3  
P02/AN10  
P04/AN12  
P07/AN15  
P10/INT41  
P20(LED0)  
P21(LED1)  
P22(LED2)  
51  
47  
45  
42  
39  
27  
29  
28  
7
6
P35/TXD3  
P01/AN9  
P03/AN11  
P06/AN14  
P11/INT01  
P25(LED5)  
P23(LED3)  
P24(LED4)  
53  
52  
48  
43  
38  
37  
26  
25  
P33  
P34/RXD3  
P00/AN8  
P05/AN13  
P12  
P13  
P26(LED6)  
P27(LED7)  
56  
55  
54  
49  
33  
36  
35  
34  
5
4
3
2
1
P30/DA1  
P31/DA2  
P32  
P37/SRDY3  
P17  
P14  
P15  
P16  
1
64  
58  
59  
57  
24  
22  
23  
P62/AN2  
P63/AN3  
VREF  
AVSS  
VCC  
VSS  
XIN  
XOUT  
60  
P67/AN7  
61  
P66/AN6  
4
P57/INT3  
7
12  
14  
P45/TXD1  
21  
20  
P47/SRDY1/CNTR2  
P40/INT40/XCOUT  
P41/INT00/XCIN  
P54/CNTR0  
62  
P65/AN5  
63  
P64/AN4  
5
P56/PWM  
8
P53/SRDY2  
10  
P51/SOUT2  
13  
P46/SCLK1  
17  
P42/INT1  
19  
RESET  
2
3
6
9
11  
15  
16  
18  
P61/AN1  
P60/AN0  
P55/CNTR1  
P52/SCLK2  
P50/SIN2  
P44/RXD1  
P43/INT2  
CNVSS  
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
Package code : PTLG0064JA-A (64F0G)  
M38039MFL  
-XXXWG  
M38039  
Note : The numbers in circles corresponds with the number on the packages FP/HP/KP.  
FFLWG  
Package (TOP VIEW)  
Fig 3. Pin configuration (Top view) (PTLG0064JA-A (64F0G))  
Rev.1.00 Apr 2, 2007  
REJ03B0212-0100  
Page 3 of 117  
3803 Group (Spec.L)  
Table 1 Performance overview  
Parameter  
Number of basic instructions  
Minimum instruction execution time  
Oscillation frequency  
Function  
71  
0.24 µs (Oscillation frequency 16.8 MHz)  
Oscillation frequency 16.8 MHz(Maximum)  
Memory  
sizes  
Mask ROM version  
Flash memory version  
P0-P6  
ROM  
RAM  
ROM  
RAM  
60 Kbytes  
2048 bytes  
60 Kbytes  
2048 bytes  
I/O port  
56 pins  
Software pull-up resistors  
Interrupt  
Built-in  
21 sources, 16 vectors (8 external, 12 internal, 1 software)  
8-bit × 4 (with 8-bit prescaler), 16-bit × 1  
Timer  
Serial interface  
8-bit × 2 (UART or Clock-synchronized)  
8-bit × 1 (Clock-synchronized)  
PWM  
8-bit × 1 (with 8-bit prescaler)  
A/D converter  
10-bit × 16 channels (8-bit reading enabled)  
8-bit × 2 channels  
D/A converter  
Watchdog timer  
LED direct drive port  
Clock generating circuits  
16-bit × 1  
8 (average current: 15 mA, peak current: 30 mA, total current: 90 mA)  
Built-in 2 circuits  
(connect to external ceramic rasonator or quartz-crystal oscillator)  
Power  
source  
voltage  
In high-speed  
mode  
Mask ROM version  
Flash memory version  
Mask ROM version  
Flash memory version  
Mask ROM version  
Flash memory version  
At 16.8 MHz  
At 12.5 MHz  
At 8.4 MHz  
4.5 to 5.5 V  
4.0 to 5.5 V  
2.7 to 5.5 V  
At 4.2 MHz Mask ROM version  
At 2.1 MHz Mask ROM version  
2.2 to 5.5 V  
2.0 to 5.5 V  
In middle-  
speed mode  
Mask ROM version  
At 16.8 MHz  
4.5 to 5.5 V  
2.7 to 5.5 V  
Flash memory version  
Mask ROM version  
At 12.5 MHz  
Flash memory version  
At 8.4 MHz Mask ROM version  
At 6.3 MHz Mask ROM version  
2.2 to 5.5 V  
1.8 to 5.5 V  
1.8 to 5.5 V  
In low-speed  
mode  
Mask ROM version  
At 32 MHz  
Flash memory version 2.7 to 5.5 V  
Power  
dissipation  
In high-speed mode  
Mask ROM version  
Flash memory version 27.5 mW  
Mask ROM version 45 µW  
40 mW  
In low-speed mode  
Flash memory version 1200 µW  
Input/Output Input/Output withstand voltage  
VCC  
characteris-  
tics  
Output current  
10 mA  
Operating temperature range  
Device structure  
-20 to 85 °C  
CMOS sillicon gate  
64-pin plastic molded SDIP/LQFP/FLGA  
Package  
Rev.1.00 Apr 2, 2007  
REJ03B0212-0100  
Page 4 of 117  
3803 Group (Spec.L)  
Fig 4. Functional block diagram  
Rev.1.00 Apr 2, 2007  
REJ03B0212-0100  
Page 5 of 117  
3803 Group (Spec.L)  
PIN DESCRIPTION  
Table 2 Pin description  
Pin  
Name  
Functions  
Function except a port function  
VCC, VSS  
Power source  
CNVSS input  
• Apply voltage of 1.8 V 5.5 V to VCC, and 0 V to VSS. In the flash memory version, apply  
voltage of 2.7 V 5.5 V to VCC.  
• This pin controls the operation mode of the chip.  
• Normally connected to VSS.  
CNVSS  
VREF  
Reference  
voltage  
• Reference voltage input pin for A/D and D/A converters.  
AVSS  
Analog power  
source  
• Analog power source input pin for A/D and D/A converters.  
• Connect to VSS.  
RESET  
XIN  
Reset input  
• Reset input pin for active “L”.  
Main clock input • Input and output pins for the clock generating circuit.  
• Connect a ceramic resonator or quartz-crystal oscillator between the XIN and XOUT pins to set  
the oscillation frequency.  
• When an external clock is used, connect the clock source to the XIN pin and leave the XOUT pin  
open.  
XOUT  
Main clock  
output  
P00/AN8−  
P07/AN15  
I/O port P0  
I/O port P1  
• 8-bit CMOS I/O port.  
• A/D converter input pin  
• I/O direction register allows each pin to be individually  
programmed as either input or output.  
• CMOS compatible input level.  
P10/INT41  
P11/INT01  
• Interrupt input pin  
• CMOS 3-state output structure.  
• Pull-up control is enabled in a bit unit.  
• P20 P27 (8 bits) are enabled to output large current for  
LED drive.  
P12P17  
P20(LED0)-  
P27(LED7)  
I/O port P2  
I/O port P3  
P30/DA1  
• 8-bit CMOS I/O port.  
• D/A converter input pin  
• Serial I/O3 function pin  
P31/DA2  
P32, P33  
• I/O direction register allows each pin to be individually  
programmed as either input or output.  
• CMOS compatible input level.  
• P30, P31, P34 P37 are CMOS 3-state output structure.  
• P32, P33 are N-channel open-drain output structure.  
• Pull-up control of P30, P31, P34 P37 is enabled in a bit unit.  
P34/RXD3  
P35/TXD3  
P36/SCLK3  
P37/SRDY3  
P40/INT40/XCOUT  
P41/INT00/XCIN  
I/O port P4  
• 8-bit CMOS I/O port.  
• Interrupt input pin  
• Sub-clock generating I/O pin  
(resonator connected)  
• I/O direction register allows each pin to be individually  
programmed as either input or output.  
• CMOS compatible input level.  
• CMOS 3-state output structure.  
• Pull-up control is enabled in a bit unit.  
P42/INT1  
P43/INT2  
• Interrupt input pin  
P44/RXD1  
P45/TXD1  
P46/SCLK1  
• Serial I/O1 function pin  
• Serial I/O1, timer Z function pin  
• Serial I/O2 function pin  
P47/SRDY1/CNTR2  
P50/SIN2  
I/O port P5  
P51/SOUT2  
P52/SCLK2  
P53/SRDY2  
P54/CNTR0  
P55/CNTR1  
P56/PWM  
P57/INT3  
• Timer X function pin  
• Timer Y function pin  
• PWM output pin  
• Interrupt input pin  
• A/D converter input pin  
P60/AN0−  
I/O port P6  
P67/AN7  
Rev.1.00 Apr 2, 2007  
REJ03B0212-0100  
Page 6 of 117  
3803 Group (Spec.L)  
PART NUMBERING  
Product name  
L−  
M3803 9  
M
F
XXX SP  
Package code  
SP : PRDP0064BA-A (64P4B)  
HP : PLQP0064KB-A (64P6Q-A)  
KP : PLQP0064GA-A (64P6U-A)  
WG : PTLG0064JA-A (64F0G)  
ROM number  
Omitted in the flash memory version.  
: standard  
Omitted in the flash memory version.  
L: Minner spec. change product  
ROM/Flash memory size  
9: 36864 bytes  
A: 40960 bytes  
B: 45056 bytes  
C: 49152 bytes  
D: 53248 bytes  
E: 57344 bytes  
F: 61440 bytes  
1: 4096 bytes  
2: 8192 bytes  
3: 12288 bytes  
4: 16384 bytes  
5: 20480 bytes  
6: 24576 bytes  
7: 28672 bytes  
8: 32768 bytes  
The first 128 bytes and the last 2 bytes of ROM are reserved areas ; they  
cannot be used as a user’s ROM area.  
However, they can be programmed or erased in the flash memory version,  
so that the users can use them.  
Memory type  
M: Mask ROM version  
F: Flash memory version  
RAM size  
0: 192 bytes  
1: 256 bytes  
2: 384 bytes  
3: 512 bytes  
4: 640 bytes  
5: 768 bytes  
6: 896 bytes  
7: 1024 bytes  
8: 1536 bytes  
9: 2048 bytes  
Fig 5. Part numbering  
Rev.1.00 Apr 2, 2007  
REJ03B0212-0100  
Page 7 of 117  
3803 Group (Spec.L)  
GROUP EXPANSION  
Packages  
• PRDP0064BA-A (64P4B)  
..............................................64-pin shrink plastic-molded DIP  
• PLQP0064KB-A (64P6Q-A)  
...........................................0.5 mm-pitch plastic molded LQFP  
• PLQP0064GA-A (64P6U-A)  
...........................................0.8 mm-pitch plastic molded LQFP  
• PTLG0064JA-A (64F0G)  
Renesas plans to expand the 3803 group (Spec.L) as follows.  
Memory Size  
• Flash memory size .....................................................60 Kbytes  
• Mask ROM size .........................................................60 Kbytes  
• RAM size................................................................. 2048 bytes  
........................................0.65 mm-pitch plastic molded FLGA  
Memory Expansion Plan  
ROM size (bytes)  
M38039FFL  
M38039MFL  
60 K  
48 K  
32 K  
28 K  
24 K  
20 K  
16 K  
12 K  
8 K  
384 512 640 768 896 1024 1152 1280 1408 1536 2048 3072 4032  
RAM size (bytes)  
Fig 6. Memory expansion plan  
Table 3 Support products  
ROM size (bytes)  
ROM size for User in ( )  
RAM size  
(bytes)  
Part No.  
Package  
Remarks  
M38039MFL-XXXSP  
M38039MFL-XXXHP  
M38039MFL-XXXKP  
M38039MFL-XXXWG  
M38039FFLSP  
PRDP0064BA-A (64P4B)  
PLQP0064KB-A (64P6Q-A)  
PLQP0064GA-A (64P6U-A)  
PTLG0064JA-A (64F0G)  
PRDP0064BA-A (64P4B)  
PLQP0064KB-A (64P6Q-A)  
PLQP0064GA-A (64P6U-A)  
PTLG0064JA-A (64F0G)  
61440  
(61310)  
2048  
2048  
Mask ROM version  
M38039FFLHP  
Flash memory version  
VCC = 2.7 to 5.5 V  
57344+4096 (NOTE)  
M38039FFLKP  
M38039FFLWG  
NOTE:  
1. ROM size includes the ID code area.  
Rev.1.00 Apr 2, 2007  
REJ03B0212-0100  
Page 8 of 117  
3803 Group (Spec.L)  
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION  
[Stack Pointer (S)]  
The stack pointer is an 8-bit register used during subroutine calls  
and interrupts. This register indicates start address of stored area  
(stack) for storing registers during subroutine calls and  
interrupts.  
The low-order 8 bits of the stack address are determined by the  
contents of the stack pointer. The high-order 8 bits of the stack  
address are determined by the stack page selection bit. If the  
stack page selection bit is “0”, the high-order 8 bits becomes  
“0016”. If the stack page selection bit is “1”, the high-order 8 bits  
becomes “0116”.  
The operations of pushing register contents onto the stack and  
popping them from the stack are shown in Figure 8.  
Store registers other than those described in Figure 7 with  
program when the user needs them during interrupts or  
subroutine calls (see Table 4).  
CENTRAL PROCESSING UNIT (CPU)  
The 3803 group (Spec.L) uses the standard 740 Family  
instruction set. Refer to the table of 740 Family addressing  
modes and machine instructions or the 740 Family Software  
Manual for details on the instruction set.  
Machine-resident 740 Family instructions are as follows:  
The FST and SLW instructions cannot be used.  
The STP, WIT, MUL, and DIV instructions can be used.  
[Accumulator (A)]  
The accumulator is an 8-bit register. Data operations such as data  
transfer, etc. are executed mainly through the accumulator.  
[Index Register X (X)]  
The index register X is an 8-bit register. In the index addressing  
modes, the value of the OPERAND is added to the contents of  
register X and specifies the real address.  
[Program Counter (PC)]  
The program counter is a 16-bit counter consisting of two 8-bit  
registers PCH and PCL. It is used to indicate the address of the  
next instruction to be executed.  
[Index Register Y (Y)]  
The index register Y is an 8-bit register. In partial instruction, the  
value of the OPERAND is added to the contents of register Y  
and specifies the real address.  
b7  
b0  
A
Accumulator  
b7  
b0  
X
Index Register X  
b7  
b0  
Y
Index Register Y  
b0  
b7  
S
Stack Pointer  
b15  
b7  
b7  
b0  
PCH  
PCL  
Program Counter  
b0  
N V T B D I Z C  
Processor Status Register (PS)  
Carry Flag  
Zero Flag  
Interrupt Disable Flag  
Decimal Mode Flag  
Break Flag  
Index X Mode Flag  
Overflow Flag  
Negative Flag  
Fig 7. 740 Family CPU register structure  
Rev.1.00 Apr 2, 2007  
REJ03B0212-0100  
Page 9 of 117  
3803 Group (Spec.L)  
On-going Routine  
Interrupt request(1)  
M(S)(PCH)  
(S)(S) 1  
M(S)(PCL)  
Push Return Address  
on Stack  
Execute JSR  
Push Return  
Address  
on Stack  
M(S)(PCH)  
(S)(S) 1  
M(S)(PS)  
(S)(S) 1  
Push Contents of  
Processor  
Status Register on Stack  
(S)(S) 1  
M(S)(PCL)  
(S)(S) 1  
Subroutine  
Interrupt  
Service Routine  
I Flag is Set from  
“0” to “1”  
Fetch the Jump  
Vector  
Execute RTI  
(S)(S) + 1  
(PS)M(S)  
(S)(S) + 1  
(PCL)M(S)  
(S)(S) + 1  
(PCH)M(S)  
Execute RTS  
POP Contents of  
Processor Status Register  
from Stack  
(S)(S) + 1  
POP Return  
Address from  
Stack  
(PCL)M(S)  
(S)(S) + 1  
(PCH)M(S)  
POP Return  
Address from Stack  
Note 1 : Condition for acceptance of an interrupt Interrupt enable flag is “1”  
Interrupt disable flag is “0”  
Fig 8. Register push and pop at interrupt generation and subroutine call  
Table 4 Push and pop instructions of accumulator or processor status register  
Push instruction to stack  
Pop instruction from stack  
Accumulator  
PHA  
PHP  
PLA  
PLP  
Processor status register  
Rev.1.00 Apr 2, 2007  
REJ03B0212-0100  
Page 10 of 117  
3803 Group (Spec.L)  
[Processor status register (PS)]  
Bit 4: Break flag (B)  
The B flag is used to indicate that the current interrupt was  
generated by the BRK instruction. The BRK flag in the  
processor status register is always “0”. When the BRK  
instruction is used to generate an interrupt, the processor  
status register is pushed onto the stack with the break flag set  
to “1”.  
The processor status register is an 8-bit register consisting of 5  
flags which indicate the status of the processor after an  
arithmetic operation and 3 flags which decide MCU operation.  
Branch operations can be performed by testing the Carry (C)  
flag, Zero (Z) flag, Overflow (V) flag, or the Negative (N) flag.  
In decimal mode, the Z, V, N flags are not valid.  
Bit 5: Index X mode flag (T)  
Bit 0: Carry flag (C)  
When the T flag is “0”, arithmetic operations are performed  
between accumulator and memory. When the T flag is “1”,  
direct arithmetic operations and direct data transfers are  
enabled between memory locations.  
The C flag contains a carry or borrow generated by the  
arithmetic logic unit (ALU) immediately after an arithmetic  
operation. It can also be changed by a shift or rotate  
instruction.  
Bit 6: Overflow flag (V)  
Bit 1: Zero flag (Z)  
The V flag is used during the addition or subtraction of one  
byte of signed data. It is set if the result exceeds +127 to −  
128. When the BIT instruction is executed, bit 6 of the  
memory location operated on by the BIT instruction is stored  
in the overflow flag.  
The Z flag is set if the result of an immediate arithmetic  
operation or a data transfer is “0”, and cleared if the result is  
anything other than “0”.  
Bit 2: Interrupt disable flag (I)  
The I flag disables all interrupts except for the interrupt  
generated by the BRK instruction.  
Interrupts are disabled when the I flag is “1”.  
Bit 7: Negative flag (N)  
The N flag is set if the result of an arithmetic operation or  
data transfer is negative. When the BIT instruction is  
executed, bit 7 of the memory location operated on by the  
BIT instruction is stored in the negative flag.  
Bit 3: Decimal mode flag (D)  
The D flag determines whether additions and subtractions are  
executed in binary or decimal. Binary arithmetic is executed  
when this flag is “0”; decimal arithmetic is executed when it  
is “1”.  
Decimal correction is automatic in decimal mode. Only the  
ADC and SBC instructions can execute decimal arithmetic.  
Table 5 Set and clear instructions of each bit of processor status register  
C flag  
SEC  
CLC  
Z flag  
I flag  
SEI  
D flag  
SED  
CLD  
B flag  
T flag  
SET  
CLT  
V flag  
CLV  
N flag  
Set instruction  
Clear instruction  
CLI  
Rev.1.00 Apr 2, 2007  
REJ03B0212-0100  
Page 11 of 117  
3803 Group (Spec.L)  
[CPU Mode Register (CPUM)] 003B16  
The CPU mode register contains the stack page selection bit, the  
internal system clock control bits, etc.  
The CPU mode register is allocated at address 003B16.  
b7  
b0  
CPU mode register  
(CPUM: address 003B16)  
1
Processor mode bits  
b1 b0  
0
0
1
1
0 : Single-chip mode  
1 :  
0 :  
1 :  
Not available  
Stack page selection bit  
0 : 0 page  
1 : 1 page  
Fix this bit to “1”.  
Port XC switch bit  
0 : I/O port function (stop oscillating)  
1 : XCIN-XCOUT oscillating function  
Main clock (XIN-XOUT) stop bit  
0 : Oscillating  
1 : Stopped  
Main clock division ratio selection bits  
b7 b6  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
: φ = f(XIN)/2 (high-speed mode)  
: φ = f(XIN)/8 (middle-speed mode)  
: φ = f(XCIN)/2 (low-speed mode)  
: Not available  
Fig 9. Structure of CPU mode register  
Rev.1.00 Apr 2, 2007  
REJ03B0212-0100  
Page 12 of 117  
3803 Group (Spec.L)  
MISRG  
• Middle-speed mode automatic switch by program  
The middle-speed mode can also be automatically switched by  
program while operating in low-speed mode. By setting the  
middle-speed automatic switch start bit (bit 3) of MISRG  
(address 001016) to “1” in the condition that the middle-speed  
mode automatic switch set bit is “1” while operating in low-  
speed mode, the MCU will automatically switch to middle-speed  
mode. In this case, the oscillation stabilizing time of the main  
clock can be selected by the middle-speed automatic switch wait  
time set bit (bit 2) of MISRG (address 001016).  
(1) Bit 0 of address 001016: Oscillation stabilizing time  
set after STP instruction released bit  
When the MCU stops the clock oscillation by the STP instruction  
and the STP instruction has been released by an external  
interrupt source, usually, the fixed values of Timer 1 and  
Prescaler 12 (Timer 1 = 0116, Prescaler 12 = FF16) are  
automatically reloaded in order for the oscillation to stabilize.  
The user can inhibit the automatic setting by setting “1” to bit 0  
of MISRG (address 001016).  
However, by setting this bit to “1”, the previous values, set just  
before the STP instruction was executed, will remain in Timer 1  
and Prescaler 12. Therefore, you will need to set an appropriate  
value to each register, in accordance with the oscillation  
stabilizing time, before executing the STP instruction.  
Figure 10 shows the structure of MISRG.  
(2) Bits 1, 2, 3 of address 001016: Middle-speed Mode  
Automatic Switch Function  
In order to switch the clock mode of an MCU which has a sub-  
clock, the following procedure is necessary:  
set CPU mode register (003B16) --> start main clock oscillation  
--> wait for oscillation stabilization --> switch to middle-speed  
mode (or high-speed mode).  
However, the 3803 group (Spec.L) has the built-in function  
which automatically switches from low to middle-speed mode by  
program.  
b7  
b0  
MISRG  
(MISRG: address 001016)  
Oscillation stabilizing time set after STP instruction  
released bit  
0 : Automatically set “0116” to Timer 1, “FF16” to  
Prescaler 12  
1 : Automatically set disabled  
Middle-speed mode automatic switch set bit  
0 : Not set automatically  
1 : Automatic switching enabled(1)  
Middle-speed mode automatic switch wait time set bit  
0 : 4.5 to 5.5 machine cycles  
1 : 6.5 to 7.5 machine cycles  
Middle-speed mode automatic switch start bit  
(Depending on program)  
0 : Invalid  
1 : Automatic switch start(1)  
Not used (return “0” when read)  
(Do not write “1” to this bit)  
Note 1 : When automatic switch to middle-speed mode from low-speed mode occurs,  
the values of CPU mode register (3B16) change.  
Fig 10. Structure of MISRG  
Rev.1.00 Apr 2, 2007  
REJ03B0212-0100  
Page 13 of 117  
3803 Group (Spec.L)  
MEMORY  
• Interrupt Vector Area  
The interrupt vector area contains reset and interrupt vectors.  
• Special Function Register (SFR) Area  
The Special Function Register area in the zero page contains  
control registers such as I/O ports and timers.  
• Zero Page  
Access to this area with only 2 bytes is possible in the zero page  
addressing mode.  
• RAM  
The RAM is used for data storage and for stack area of  
subroutine calls and interrupts.  
• Special Page  
Access to this area with only 2 bytes is possible in the special  
page addressing mode.  
• ROM  
The first 128 bytes and the last 2 bytes of ROM are reserved for  
device testing and the rest is a user area for storing programs.  
The reserved ROM area can program/erase in the flash memory  
version.  
<Note>  
Since the contents of RAM are undefined at reset, be sure to set  
an initial value before use.  
RAM area  
Address  
XXXX16  
RAM size  
(bytes)  
000016  
SFR area  
192  
256  
00FF16  
013F16  
01BF16  
023F16  
02BF16  
033F16  
03BF16  
043F16  
063F16  
083F16  
Zero page  
004016  
384  
010016  
512  
RAM  
640  
768  
XXXX16  
Not used  
0FE016  
896  
1024  
1536  
2048  
SFR area (Note 1)  
0FEF16  
0FF016  
SFR area  
0FFF16  
Not used  
ROM area  
YYYY16  
ROM size  
(bytes)  
Address  
YYYY16  
Address  
ZZZZ16  
Reserved ROM area  
(128 bytes)  
4096  
8192  
F00016  
E00016  
D00016  
C00016  
B00016  
A00016  
900016  
800016  
700016  
600016  
500016  
400016  
300016  
200016  
100016  
F08016  
E08016  
D08016  
C08016  
B08016  
A08016  
908016  
808016  
708016  
608016  
508016  
408016  
308016  
208016  
108016  
ZZZZ16  
FF0016  
12288  
16384  
20480  
24576  
28672  
32768  
36864  
40960  
45056  
49152  
53248  
57344  
61440  
ROM  
Special page  
FFDC16  
Interrupt vector area  
Reserved ROM area  
FFFE16  
FFFF16  
Notes 1: Only flash memory version has this SFR area.  
2: The reserved ROM area can program/erase in  
the flash memory version. Note the difference of  
the mask version.  
Fig 11. Memory map diagram  
Rev.1.00 Apr 2, 2007  
REJ03B0212-0100  
Page 14 of 117  
3803 Group (Spec.L)  
Port P0 (P0)  
Prescaler 12 (PRE12)  
Timer 1 (T1)  
000016  
000116  
000216  
000316  
000416  
000516  
000616  
000716  
000816  
000916  
000A16  
000B16  
000C16  
000D16  
000E16  
000F16  
001016  
001116  
001216  
001316  
001416  
001516  
001616  
001716  
001816  
001916  
001A16  
001B16  
001C16  
001D16  
001E16  
001F16  
002016  
002116  
002216  
002316  
002416  
002516  
002616  
002716  
002816  
002916  
002A16  
002B16  
002C16  
002D16  
002E16  
002F16  
003016  
003116  
003216  
003316  
003416  
003516  
003616  
003716  
003816  
003916  
003A16  
003B16  
003C16  
003D16  
003E16  
003F16  
Port P0 direction register (P0D)  
Port P1 (P1)  
Timer 2 (T2)  
Port P1 direction register (P1D)  
Port P2 (P2)  
Timer XY mode register (TM)  
Prescaler X (PREX)  
Timer X (TX)  
Port P2 direction register (P2D)  
Port P3 (P3)  
Prescaler Y (PREY)  
Timer Y (TY)  
Port P3 direction register (P3D)  
Port P4 (P4)  
Timer Z low-order (TZL)  
Timer Z high-order (TZH)  
Timer Z mode register (TZM)  
PWM control register (PWMCON)  
PWM prescaler (PREPWM)  
PWM register (PWM)  
Port P4 direction register (P4D)  
Port P5 (P5)  
Port P5 direction register (P5D)  
Port P6 (P6)  
Port P6 direction register (P6D)  
Timer 12, X count source selection register (T12XCSS)  
Timer Y, Z count source selection register (TYZCSS)  
MISRG  
Baud rate generator 3 (BRG3)  
Transmit/Receive buffer register 3 (TB3/RB3)  
Serial I/O3 status register (SIO3STS)  
Serial I/O3 control register (SIO3CON)  
UART3 control register (UART3CON)  
AD/DA control register (ADCON)  
AD conversion register 1 (AD1)  
Reserved (Note 1)  
Reserved (Note 1)  
Reserved (Note 1)  
Reserved (Note 1)  
Reserved (Note 1)  
Reserved (Note 1)  
DA1 conversion register (DA1)  
Reserved (Note 1)  
DA2 conversion register (DA2)  
Transmit/Receive buffer register 1 (TB1/RB1)  
Serial I/O1 status register (SIO1STS)  
Serial I/O1 control register (SIO1CON)  
UART1 control register (UART1CON)  
Baud rate generator (BRG1)  
Serial I/O2 control register (SIO2CON)  
Watchdog timer control register (WDTCON)  
Serial I/O2 register (SIO2)  
AD conversion register 2 (AD2)  
Interrupt source selection register (INTSEL)  
Interrupt edge selection register (INTEDGE)  
CPU mode register (CPUM)  
Interrupt request register 1 (IREQ1)  
Interrupt request register 2 (IREQ2)  
Interrupt control register 1 (ICON1)  
Interrupt control register 2 (ICON2)  
Flash memory control register 0 (FMCR0)  
Flash memory control register 1 (FMCR1)  
Flash memory control register 2 (FMCR2)  
Reserved (Note 1)  
Port P0 pull-up control register (PULL0)  
Port P1 pull-up control register (PULL1)  
Port P2 pull-up control register (PULL2)  
Port P3 pull-up control register (PULL3)  
Port P4 pull-up control register (PULL4)  
Port P5 pull-up control register (PULL5)  
Port P6 pull-up control register (PULL6)  
0FE016  
0FE116  
0FE216  
0FE316  
0FE416  
0FE516  
0FE616  
0FE716  
0FE816  
0FE916  
0FEA16  
0FEB16  
0FEC16  
0FED16  
0FEE16  
0FEF16  
0FF016  
0FF116  
0FF216  
0FF316  
0FF416  
0FF516  
0FF616  
Reserved (Note 1)  
Reserved (Note 1)  
Reserved (Note 1)  
Reserved (Note 1)  
Reserved (Note 1)  
Notes1: Do not write any data to these addresses, because these are  
reserved area.  
Reserved (Note 1)  
2: Do not access to the SFR area including nothing.  
Reserved (Note 1)  
Reserved (Note 1)  
Reserved (Note 1)  
Reserved (Note 1)  
Reserved (Note 1)  
Reserved (Note 1)  
Fig 12. Memory map of special function register (SFR)  
Rev.1.00 Apr 2, 2007  
REJ03B0212-0100  
Page 15 of 117  
3803 Group (Spec.L)  
I/O PORTS  
input are floating. If a pin set to input is written to, only the port  
output latch is written to and the pin remains floating.  
By setting the port P0 pull-up control register (address 0FF016)  
to the port P6 pull-up control register (address 0FF616) ports can  
control pull-up with a program. However, the contents of these  
registers do not affect ports programmed as the output ports.  
The I/O ports have direction registers which determine the  
input/output direction of each individual pin. Each bit in a  
direction register corresponds to one pin, and each pin can be set  
to be input port or output port.  
When “0” is written to the bit corresponding to a pin, that pin  
becomes an input pin. When “1” is written to that bit, that pin  
becomes an output pin.  
If data is read from a pin which is set to output, the value of the  
port output latch is read, not the value of the pin itself. Pins set to  
Table 6  
I/O port function  
Pin  
Name  
Input/  
Output  
I/O Structure  
Non-Port Function  
Related SFRs  
Ref.  
No.  
P00/AN8P07/AN15  
Port P0 Input/output, CMOScompatible A/D converter input  
AD/DA control register  
(1)  
individual  
bits  
input level  
CMOS 3-state  
output  
P1  
0
/INT41  
/INT01  
Port P1  
External interrupt input  
Interrupt edge selection register (2)  
P11  
P12P17  
(3)  
P20(LED0)−  
P27(LED7)  
Port P2  
Port P3  
P30/DA1  
D/A converter output  
AD/DA control register  
(4)  
(5)  
P31/DA2  
P32, P33  
CMOScompatible  
input level  
N-channel  
open-drain output  
P34/RXD3  
P35/TXD3  
P36/SCLK3  
P37/SRDY3  
CMOScompatible Serial I/O3 function I/O  
Serial I/O3 control register  
UART3 control register  
(6)  
(7)  
(8)  
(9)  
input level  
CMOS 3-state  
output  
P40/INT40/XCOUT  
P41/INT00/XCIN  
P42/INT1  
P43/INT2  
Port P4  
External interrupt input  
External interrupt input  
Serial I/O1 function I/O  
Interrupt edge selection register (10)  
Sub-clock generating circuit CPU mode register  
(11)  
Interrupt edge selection register (2)  
P44/RXD1  
P45/TXD1  
P46/SCLK1  
Serial I/O1 control register  
UART1 control register  
(6)  
(7)  
(8)  
Serial I/O1 function I/O  
Timer Z function I/O  
Serial I/O1 control register  
Timer Z mode register  
(12)  
P47/SRDY1/CNTR2  
P50/SIN2  
Port P5  
Serial I/O2 function I/O  
Serial I/O2 control register  
(13)  
(14)  
(15)  
(16)  
P51/SOUT2  
P52/SCLK2  
P53/SRDY2  
P54/CNTR0  
P55/CNTR1  
Timer X, Y function I/O  
Timer XY mode register  
PWM control register  
(17)  
P56/PWM  
PWM output  
(18)  
P57/INT3  
External interrupt input  
A/D converter input  
Interrupt edge selection register (2)  
AD/DA control register (1)  
P60/AN0P67/AN7  
NOTES:  
Port P6  
1. Refer to the applicable sections how to use double-function ports as function I/O ports.  
2. Make sure that the input level at each pin is either 0 V or VCC during execution of the STP instruction.  
When an input level is at an intermediate potential, a current will flow from VCC to VSS through the input-stage gate.  
Rev.1.00 Apr 2, 2007  
REJ03B0212-0100  
Page 16 of 117  
3803 Group (Spec.L)  
(1) Ports P0, P6  
(2) Ports P10, P11, P42, P43, P57  
Pull-up control bit  
Pull-up control bit  
Direction  
register  
Direction  
register  
Port latch  
Port latch  
Data bus  
Data bus  
A/D converter input  
Interrupt input  
Analog input pin  
selection bit  
(3) Ports P12 to P17, P2  
(4) Ports P30, P31  
Pull-up control bit  
Pull-up control bit  
Direction  
register  
Direction  
register  
Port latch  
Data bus  
Port latch  
Data bus  
D/A converter output  
DA1 output enable bit (P30)  
DA2 output enable bit (P31)  
(5) Ports P32, P33  
(6) Ports P34, P44  
Pull-up control bit  
Serial I/O enable bit  
Receive enable bit  
Direction  
register  
Direction  
register  
Port latch  
Data bus  
Data bus  
Port latch  
Serial I/O input  
(7) Ports P35, P45  
(8) Ports P36, P46  
Pull-up control bit  
Serial I/O synchronous clock  
selection bit  
Pull-up control bit  
Serial I/O enable bit  
Transmit enable bit  
P-channel  
Serial I/O enable bit  
Serial I/O mode selection bit  
output  
disable bit  
Serial I/O enable bit  
Direction  
register  
Direction  
register  
Data bus  
Port latch  
Data bus  
Port latch  
Serial I/O output  
Serial I/O clock output  
Serial I/O external clock input  
Fig 13. Port block diagram (1)  
Rev.1.00 Apr 2, 2007  
REJ03B0212-0100  
Page 17 of 117  
3803 Group (Spec.L)  
(9) Port P37  
(10) Port P40  
Pull-up control bit  
Pull-up control bit  
Serial I/O3 mode selection bit  
Serial I/O3 enable bit  
Port XC switch bit  
SRDY3 output enable bit  
Direction  
register  
Direction  
register  
Data bus  
Port latch  
Data bus  
Port latch  
INT40 Interrupt input  
Serial I/O3 ready output  
Port XC  
switch bit  
(11) Port P41  
(12) Port P47  
Pull-up control bit  
Timer Z operating  
mode bits  
Pull-up control bit  
Port XC switch bit  
Bit 2  
Bit 1  
Bit 0  
Direction  
register  
Serial I/O1 mode selection bit  
Serial I/O1 enable bit  
Data bus  
Port latch  
SRDY1 output enable bit  
Direction  
register  
INT00 Interrupt input  
Data bus  
Port latch  
Port XC  
switch bit  
Sub-clock generating circuit input  
Timer output  
Serial I/O1 ready output  
CNTR2 interrupt input  
(13) Port P50  
(14) Port P51  
Pull-up control bit  
Pull-up control bit  
P-channel  
output  
disable bit  
Serial I/O2 transmit completion signal  
Serial I/O2 port selection bit  
Direction  
register  
Direction  
register  
Data bus  
Port latch  
Data bus  
Port latch  
Serial I/O2 input  
Serial I/O2 output  
Fig 14. Port block diagram (2)  
Rev.1.00 Apr 2, 2007  
REJ03B0212-0100  
Page 18 of 117  
3803 Group (Spec.L)  
(15) Port P52  
(16) Port P53  
Pull-up control bit  
Pull-up control bit  
Serial I/O2 synchronous clock  
selection bit  
SRDY2 output enable bit  
Serial I/O2 port selection bit  
Direction  
register  
Direction  
register  
Data bus  
Port latch  
Data bus  
Port latch  
Serial I/O2 ready output  
Serial I/O2 clock output  
Serial I/O2 external clock input  
(17) Ports P54, P55  
(18) Port P56  
Pull-up control bit  
Pull-up control bit  
PWM function enable bit  
Direction  
register  
Direction  
register  
Data bus  
Port latch  
Data bus  
Port latch  
Pulse output mode  
Timer output  
PWM output  
CNTR Interrupt input  
Fig 15. Port block diagram (3)  
Rev.1.00 Apr 2, 2007  
REJ03B0212-0100  
Page 19 of 117  
3803 Group (Spec.L)  
b7  
b0  
Port P0 pull-up control register  
(PULL0: address 0FF016)  
P00 pull-up control bit  
0: No pull-up  
1: Pull-up  
P01 pull-up control bit  
0: No pull-up  
1: Pull-up  
P02 pull-up control bit  
0: No pull-up  
1: Pull-up  
P03 pull-up control bit  
0: No pull-up  
1: Pull-up  
P04 pull-up control bit  
0: No pull-up  
1: Pull-up  
P05 pull-up control bit  
0: No pull-up  
1: Pull-up  
P06 pull-up control bit  
0: No pull-up  
1: Pull-up  
P07 pull-up control bit  
0: No pull-up  
Note: Pull-up control is valid when the corresponding  
bit of the port direction register is “0” (input).  
When that bit is “1” (output), pull-up cannot be  
set to the port of which pull-up is selected.  
1: Pull-up  
b7  
b0  
Port P1 pull-up control register  
(PULL1: address 0FF116)  
P10 pull-up control bit  
0: No pull-up  
1: Pull-up  
P11 pull-up control bit  
0: No pull-up  
1: Pull-up  
P12 pull-up control bit  
0: No pull-up  
1: Pull-up  
P13 pull-up control bit  
0: No pull-up  
1: Pull-up  
P14 pull-up control bit  
0: No pull-up  
1: Pull-up  
P15 pull-up control bit  
0: No pull-up  
1: Pull-up  
P16 pull-up control bit  
0: No pull-up  
1: Pull-up  
P17 pull-up control bit  
0: No pull-up  
Note: Pull-up control is valid when the corresponding  
bit of the port direction register is “0” (input).  
When that bit is “1” (output), pull-up cannot be  
set to the port of which pull-up is selected.  
1: Pull-up  
Fig 16. Structure of port pull-up control register (1)  
Rev.1.00 Apr 2, 2007  
REJ03B0212-0100  
Page 20 of 117  
3803 Group (Spec.L)  
b7  
b0  
Port P2 pull-up control register  
(PULL2: address 0FF216)  
P20 pull-up control bit  
0: No pull-up  
1: Pull-up  
P21 pull-up control bit  
0: No pull-up  
1: Pull-up  
P22 pull-up control bit  
0: No pull-up  
1: Pull-up  
P23 pull-up control bit  
0: No pull-up  
1: Pull-up  
P24 pull-up control bit  
0: No pull-up  
1: Pull-up  
P25 pull-up control bit  
0: No pull-up  
1: Pull-up  
P26 pull-up control bit  
0: No pull-up  
1: Pull-up  
P27 pull-up control bit  
0: No pull-up  
Note: Pull-up control is valid when the corresponding  
bit of the port direction register is “0” (input).  
When that bit is “1” (output), pull-up cannot be  
set to the port of which pull-up is selected.  
1: Pull-up  
b7  
b0  
Port P3 pull-up control register  
(PULL3: address 0FF316)  
P30 pull-up control bit  
0: No pull-up  
1: Pull-up  
P31 pull-up control bit  
0: No pull-up  
1: Pull-up  
Not used  
(return “0” when read)  
P34 pull-up control bit  
0: No pull-up  
1: Pull-up  
P35 pull-up control bit  
0: No pull-up  
1: Pull-up  
P36 pull-up control bit  
0: No pull-up  
1: Pull-up  
Note: Pull-up control is valid when the corresponding  
bit of the port direction register is “0” (input).  
When that bit is “1” (output), pull-up cannot be  
set to the port of which pull-up is selected.  
P37 pull-up control bit  
0: No pull-up  
1: Pull-up  
Fig 17. Structure of port pull-up control register (2)  
Rev.1.00 Apr 2, 2007  
REJ03B0212-0100  
Page 21 of 117  
3803 Group (Spec.L)  
b7  
b0  
Port P4 pull-up control register  
(PULL4: address 0FF416)  
P40 pull-up control bit  
0: No pull-up  
1: Pull-up  
P41 pull-up control bit  
0: No pull-up  
1: Pull-up  
P42 pull-up control bit  
0: No pull-up  
1: Pull-up  
P43 pull-up control bit  
0: No pull-up  
1: Pull-up  
P44 pull-up control bit  
0: No pull-up  
1: Pull-up  
P45 pull-up control bit  
0: No pull-up  
1: Pull-up  
P46 pull-up control bit  
0: No pull-up  
1: Pull-up  
P47 pull-up control bit  
0: No pull-up  
Note: Pull-up control is valid when the corresponding  
bit of the port direction register is “0” (input).  
When that bit is “1” (output), pull-up cannot be  
set to the port of which pull-up is selected.  
1: Pull-up  
b7  
b0  
Port P5 pull-up control register  
(PULL5: address 0FF516)  
P50 pull-up control bit  
0: No pull-up  
1: Pull-up  
P51 pull-up control bit  
0: No pull-up  
1: Pull-up  
P52 pull-up control bit  
0: No pull-up  
1: Pull-up  
P53 pull-up control bit  
0: No pull-up  
1: Pull-up  
P54 pull-up control bit  
0: No pull-up  
1: Pull-up  
P55 pull-up control bit  
0: No pull-up  
1: Pull-up  
P56 pull-up control bit  
0: No pull-up  
1: Pull-up  
P57 pull-up control bit  
0: No pull-up  
Note: Pull-up control is valid when the corresponding  
bit of the port direction register is “0” (input).  
When that bit is “1” (output), pull-up cannot be  
set to the port of which pull-up is selected.  
1: Pull-up  
Fig 18. Structure of port pull-up control register (3)  
Rev.1.00 Apr 2, 2007  
REJ03B0212-0100  
Page 22 of 117  
3803 Group (Spec.L)  
b7  
b0  
Port P6 pull-up control register  
(PULL6: address 0FF616)  
P60 pull-up control bit  
0: No pull-up  
1: Pull-up  
P61 pull-up control bit  
0: No pull-up  
1: Pull-up  
P62 pull-up control bit  
0: No pull-up  
1: Pull-up  
P63 pull-up control bit  
0: No pull-up  
1: Pull-up  
P64 pull-up control bit  
0: No pull-up  
1: Pull-up  
P65 pull-up control bit  
0: No pull-up  
1: Pull-up  
P66 pull-up control bit  
0: No pull-up  
1: Pull-up  
P67 pull-up control bit  
0: No pull-up  
Note: Pull-up control is valid when the corresponding  
bit of the port direction register is “0” (input).  
When that bit is “1” (output), pull-up cannot be  
set to the port of which pull-up is selected.  
1: Pull-up  
Fig 19. Structure of port pull-up control register (4)  
Rev.1.00 Apr 2, 2007  
REJ03B0212-0100  
Page 23 of 117  
3803 Group (Spec.L)  
Termination of unused pins  
Especially, when expecting low consumption  
current (at STP or WIT instruction execution etc.),  
pull-up or pull-down input ports to prevent  
through current (builtin resistor can be used).  
We recommend processing unused pins through a  
resistor which can secure IOH(avg) or IOL(avg).  
Because, when an I/O port or a pin which have an  
output function is selected as an input port, it may  
operate as an output port by incorrect operation  
etc.  
• Termination of common pins  
I/O ports:  
Select an input port or an output port and follow  
each processing method.  
In addition, it is recommended that related  
registers be overwritten periodically to prevent  
malfunctions, etc.  
Output ports: Open.  
Input ports: If the input level become unstable, through current  
flow to an input circuit, and the power supply  
current may increase.  
Table 7 Termination of unused pins  
Pins  
Termination  
P0, P1, P2, P3, P4, P5, P6  
• Set to the input mode and connect each to VCC or VSS through a resistor of 1 kto 10 k.  
• Set to the output mode and open at “L” or “H” output state.  
VREF  
AVSS  
XOUT  
Connect to VCC or VSS (GND).  
Connect to VCC or VSS (GND).  
Open (only when using external clock)  
Rev.1.00 Apr 2, 2007  
REJ03B0212-0100  
Page 24 of 117  
3803 Group (Spec.L)  
INTERRUPTS  
An interrupt requests is accepted when all of the following  
conditions are satisfied:  
The 3803 group (Spec.L) interrupts are vector interrupts with a  
fixed priority scheme, and generated by 16 sources among 21  
sources: 8 external, 12 internal, and 1 software.  
The interrupt sources, vector addresses(1), and interrupt priority  
are shown in Table 8.  
• Interrupt disable flag.................................“0”  
• Interrupt request bit...................................“1”  
• Interrupt enable bit....................................“1”  
Though the interrupt priority is determined by hardware, priority  
processing can be performed by software using the above bits  
and flag.  
Each interrupt except the BRK instruction interrupt has the  
interrupt request bit and the interrupt enable bit. These bits and  
the interrupt disable flag (I flag) control the acceptance of  
interrupt requests. Figure 20 shows an interrupt control diagram.  
Table 8 Interrupt vector addresses and priority  
Vector  
Interrupt Request Generating  
Addresses(1)  
High Low  
FFFD16 FFFC16 At reset  
Interrupt Source  
Reset(2)  
Priority  
Remarks  
Conditions  
1
2
Non-maskable  
INT0  
FFFB16 FFFA16 At detection of either rising or falling  
edge of INT0 input  
External interrupt  
(active edge selectable)  
Timer Z  
INT1  
At timer Z underflow  
3
4
5
FFF916 FFF816 At detection of either rising or falling  
edge of INT1 input  
External interrupt  
(active edge selectable)  
Serial I/O1 reception  
FFF716 FFF616 At completion of serial I/O1 data  
reception  
Valid when serial I/O1 is selected  
Serial I/O1  
transmission  
FFF516 FFF416 At completion of serial I/O1  
transmission shift or when  
Valid when serial I/O1 is selected  
transmission buffer is empty  
Timer X  
Timer Y  
Timer 1  
Timer 2  
CNTR0  
6
7
FFF316 FFF216 At timer X underflow  
FFF116 FFF016 At timer Y underflow  
FFEF16 FFEE16 At timer 1 underflow  
FFED16 FFEC16 At timer 2 underflow  
8
STP release timer underflow  
9
10  
FFEB16 FFEA16 At detection of either rising or falling  
edge of CNTR0 input  
External interrupt  
(active edge selectable)  
CNTR1  
11  
12  
FFE916 FFE816 At detection of either rising or falling  
edge of CNTR1 input  
External interrupt  
(active edge selectable)  
Serial I/O3 reception  
Serial I/O2  
At completion of serial I/O3 data  
reception  
Valid when serial I/O3 is selected  
FFE716 FFE616 At completion of serial I/O2 data  
transmission or reception  
Valid when serial I/O2 is selected  
Timer Z  
INT2  
At timer Z underflow  
13  
14  
15  
FFE516 FFE416 At detection of either rising or falling  
edge of INT2 input  
External interrupt  
(active edge selectable)  
INT3  
FFE316 FFE216 At detection of either rising or falling  
edge of INT3 input  
External interrupt  
(active edge selectable)  
INT4  
FFE116 FFE016 At detection of either rising or falling  
edge of INT4 input  
External interrupt  
(active edge selectable)  
CNTR2  
A/D conversion  
At detection of either rising or falling  
edge of CNTR2 input  
External interrupt  
(active edge selectable)  
16  
17  
FFDF16 FFDE16 At completion of A/D conversion  
Serial I/O3  
transmission  
At completion of serial I/O3  
transmission shift or when  
transmission buffer is empty  
Valid when serial I/O3 is selected  
Non-maskable software interrupt  
BRK instruction  
NOTES:  
FFDD16 FFDC16 At BRK instruction execution  
1. Vector addresses contain interrupt jump destination addresses.  
2. Reset function in the same way as an interrupt with the highest priority.  
Rev.1.00 Apr 2, 2007  
REJ03B0212-0100  
Page 25 of 117  
3803 Group (Spec.L)  
Interrupt request bit  
Interrupt enable bit  
Interrupt disable flag (I)  
BRK instruction  
Reset  
Interrupt request  
Fig 20. Interrupt control diagram  
• Interrupt Source Selection  
• Interrupt Disable Flag  
Any of the following combinations can be selected by the  
interrupt source selection register (003916).  
1. INT0 or timer Z  
2. CNTR1 or Serial I/O3 reception  
3. Serial I/O2 or timer Z  
4. INT4 or CNTR2  
5. A/D conversion or serial I/O3 transmission  
The interrupt disable flag is assigned to bit 2 of the processor  
status register. This flag controls the acceptance of all interrupt  
requests except for the BRK instruction. When this flag is set to  
“1”, the acceptance of interrupt requests is disabled. When it is  
set to “0”, acceptance of interrupt requests is enabled. This flag is  
set to “1” with the SET instruction and set to “0” with the CLI  
instruction.  
When an interrupt request is accepted, the contents of the  
processor status register are pushed onto the stack while the  
interrupt disable flag remaines set to “0”. Subsequently, this flag  
is automatically set to “1” and multiple interrupts are disabled.  
To use multiple interrupts, set this flag to “0” with the CLI  
instruction within the interrupt processing routine.  
• External Interrupt Pin Selection  
For external interrupts INT0 and INT4, the INT0, INT4 interrupt  
switch bit in the interrupt edge selection register (bit 6 of address  
003A16) can be used to select INT00 and INT40 pin input or  
INT01 and INT41 pin input.  
The contents of the processor status register are popped off the  
stack with the RTI instruction.  
• Interrupt Request Bits  
Once an interrupt request is generated, the corresponding  
interrupt request bit is set to “1” and remaines “1” until the  
request is accepted. When the request is accepted, this bit is  
automatically set to “0”.  
Each interrupt request bit can be set to “0”, but cannot be set to  
“1”, by software.  
• Interrupt Enable Bits  
The interrupt enable bits control the acceptance of the  
corresponding interrupt requests. When an interrupt enable bit is  
set to “0”, the acceptance of the corresponding interrupt request  
is disabled. If an interrupt request occurs in this condition, the  
corresponding interrupt request bit is set to “1”, but the interrupt  
request is not accepted. When an interrupt enable bit is set to “1”,  
acceptance of the corresponding interrupt request is enabled.  
Each interrupt enable bit can be set to “0” or “1” by software.  
The interrupt enable bit for an unused interrupt should be set to  
“0”.  
Rev.1.00 Apr 2, 2007  
REJ03B0212-0100  
Page 26 of 117  
3803 Group (Spec.L)  
b7  
b0  
Interrupt edge selection register  
(INTEDGE : address 003A16)  
INT0 interrupt edge selection bit  
INT1 interrupt edge selection bit  
Not used (returns “0” when read)  
INT2 interrupt edge selection bit  
INT3 interrupt edge selection bit  
INT4 interrupt edge selection bit  
INT0, INT4 interrupt switch bit  
0 : INT00, INT40 interrupt  
0 : Falling edge active  
1 : Rising edge active  
0 : Falling edge active  
1 : Rising edge active  
1 : INT01, INT41 interrupt  
Not used (returns “0” when read)  
b7  
b0  
Interrupt request register 2  
(IREQ2 : address 003D16)  
b7  
b0  
Interrupt request register 1  
(IREQ1 : address 003C16)  
INT0/Timer Z interrupt request bit  
INT1 interrupt request bit  
Serial I/O1 receive interrupt request bit  
CNTR0 interrupt request bit  
CNTR1/Serial I/O3 receive interrupt  
request bit  
Serial I/O1 transmit interrupt request bit  
Timer X interrupt request bit  
Timer Y interrupt request bit  
Timer 1 interrupt request bit  
Timer 2 interrupt request bit  
Serial I/O2/Timer Z interrupt request bit  
INT2 interrupt request bit  
INT3 interrupt request bit  
INT4/CNTR2 interrupt request bit  
AD converter/Serial I/O3 transmit  
interrupt request bit  
Not used (returns “0” when read)  
0 : No interrupt request issued  
1 : Interrupt request issued  
0 : No interrupt request issued  
1 : Interrupt request issued  
Interrupt control register 1  
Interrupt control register 2  
b7  
b0  
b7  
b0  
(ICON2 : address 003F16)  
(ICON1 : address 003E16)  
INT0/Timer Z interrupt enable bit  
INT1 interrupt enable bit  
Serial I/O1 receive interrupt enable bit  
Serial I/O1 transmit interrupt enable bit  
Timer X interrupt enable bit  
Timer Y interrupt enable bit  
Timer 1 interrupt enable bit  
CNTR0 interrupt enable bit  
CNTR1/Serial I/O3 receive interrupt  
enable bit  
Serial I/O2/Timer Z interrupt enable bit  
INT2 interrupt enable bit  
INT3 interrupt enable bit  
INT4/CNTR2 interrupt enable bit  
AD converter/Serial I/O3 transmit  
interrupt enable bit  
Timer 2 interrupt enable bit  
Not used (returns “0” when read)  
(Do not write “1”.)  
0 : Interrupts disabled  
1 : Interrupts enabled  
0 : Interrupts disabled  
1 : Interrupts enabled  
b7  
b0  
Interrupt source selection register  
(INTSEL : address 003916)  
INT0/Timer Z interrupt source selection bit  
0 : INT0 interrupt  
1 : Timer Z interrupt  
Serial I/O2/Timer Z interrupt source selection bit  
0 : Serial I/O2 interrupt  
(Do not write “1” to these bits simultaneously.)  
1 : Timer Z interrupt  
Not used (Do not write “1”.)  
INT4/CNTR2 interrupt source selection bit  
0 : INT4 interrupt  
1 : CNTR2 interrupt  
Not used (Do not write “1”.)  
CNTR1/Serial I/O3 receive interrupt source selection bit  
0 : CNTR1 interrupt  
1 : Serial I/O3 receive interrupt  
AD converter/Serial I/O3 transmit interrupt source selection bit  
0 : A/D converter interrupt  
1 : Serial I/O3 transmit interrupt  
Fig 21. Structure of interrupt-related registers  
Rev.1.00 Apr 2, 2007  
REJ03B0212-0100  
Page 27 of 117  
3803 Group (Spec.L)  
• Interrupt Request Generation, Acceptance, and Handling  
Interrupts have the following three phases.  
(i) Interrupt Request Generation  
<Notes>  
The interrupt request bit may be set to “1” in the following cases.  
• When setting the external interrupt active edge  
Related registers:Interrupt edge selection register  
(address 003A16)  
An interrupt request is generated by an interrupt source  
(external interrupt signal input, timer underflow, etc.) and  
the corresponding request bit is set to “1”.  
Timer XY mode register (address 002316)  
Timer Z mode register (address 002A16)  
(ii) Interrupt Request Acceptance  
Based on the interrupt acceptance timing in each instruction  
cycle, the interrupt control circuit determines acceptance  
conditions (interrupt request bit, interrupt enable bit, and  
interrupt disable flag) and interrupt priority levels for  
accepting interrupt requests. When two or more interrupt  
requests are generated simultaneously, the highest priority  
interrupt is accepted. The value of interrupt request bit for  
an unaccepted interrupt remains the same and acceptance is  
determined at the next interrupt acceptance timing point.  
(iii) Handling of Accepted Interrupt Request  
• When switching the interrupt sources of an interrupt vector  
address where two or more interrupt sources are assigned  
Related registers:Interrupt source selection register  
(address 003916)  
If it is not necessary to generate an interrupt synchronized with  
these settings, take the following sequence.  
(1) Set the corresponding enable bit to “0” (disabled).  
(2) Set the interrupt edge selection bit (the active edge switch  
bit) or the interrupt source bit.  
(3) Set the corresponding interrupt request bit to “0” after one  
or more instructions have been executed.  
The accepted interrupt request is processed.  
(4) Set the corresponding interrupt enable bit to “1” (enabled).  
Figure 22 shows the time up to execution in the interrupt  
processing routine, and Figure 23 shows the interrupt sequence.  
Figure 24 shows the timing of interrupt request generation,  
interrupt request bit, and interrupt request acceptance.  
Interrupt request  
generated  
Interrupt request  
acceptance  
Interrupt routine  
starts  
Interrupt sequence  
• Interrupt Handling Execution  
When interrupt handling is executed, the following operations  
are performed automatically.  
Stack push and  
Vector fetch  
Interrupt handling  
routine  
Main routine  
(1) Once the currently executing instruction is completed, an  
*
7 cycles  
0 to 16 cycles  
interrupt request is accepted.  
(2) The contents of the program counters and the processor  
status register at this point are pushed onto the stack area in  
order from 1 to 3.  
7 to 23 cycles  
* When executing DIV instruction  
1. High-order bits of program counter (PCH)  
2. Low-order bits of program counter (PCL)  
3. Processor status register (PS)  
Fig 22. Time up to execution in interrupt routine  
(3) Concurrently with the push operation, the jump address of  
the corresponding interrupt (the start address of the interrupt  
processing routine) is transferred from the interrupt vector to  
the program counter.  
(4) The interrupt request bit for the corresponding interrupt is  
set to “0”. Also, the interrupt disable flag is set to “1” and  
multiple interrupts are disabled.  
Push onto stack  
Vector fetch  
Execute interrupt  
routine  
φ
SYNC  
RD  
WR  
(5) The interrupt routine is executed.  
(6) When the RTI instruction is executed, the contents of the  
registers pushed onto the stack area are popped off in the  
order from 3 to 1. Then, the routine that was before running  
interrupt processing resumes.  
S,SPS S-1,SPS S-2,SPS  
Address bus  
PC  
BL  
BH  
AL,AH  
Not used  
PCH  
PCL  
PS  
AL  
AH  
Data bus  
SYNC : CPU operation code fetch cycle  
(This is an internal signal that cannot be observed from the external unit.)  
BL, BH: Vector address of each interrupt  
AL, AH: Jump destination address of each interrupt  
SPS : “0016” or “0116”  
As described above, it is necessary to set the stack pointer and  
the jump address in the vector area corresponding to each  
interrupt to execute the interrupt processing routine.  
([SPS] is a page selected by the stack page selection bit of CPU mode register.)  
Fig 23. Interrupt sequence  
Rev.1.00 Apr 2, 2007  
REJ03B0212-0100  
Page 28 of 117  
3803 Group (Spec.L)  
Push onto stack  
Vector fetch  
Instruction cycle  
Instruction cycle  
Internal clock φ  
SYNC  
1
2
T1  
IR1T2  
IR2T3  
T1 T2 T3 : Interrupt acceptance timing points  
IR1 IR2 : Timings points at which the interrupt request bit is set to “1”.  
Note : Period 2 indicates the last φ cycle during one instruction cycle.  
(1) The interrupt request bit for an interrupt request generated during period 1 is set to “1” at timing point IR1.  
(2) The interrupt request bit for an interrupt request generated during period 2 is set to “1” at timing point IR1 or IR2.  
The timing point at which the bit is set to “1” varies depending on conditions. When two or more interrupt  
requests are generated during the period 2, each request bit may be set to “1” at timing point IR1 or IR2  
separately.  
Fig 24. Timing of interrupt request generation, interrupt request bit, and interrupt acceptance  
Rev.1.00 Apr 2, 2007  
REJ03B0212-0100  
Page 29 of 117  
3803 Group (Spec.L)  
TIMERS  
(1) Timer mode  
• Mode selection  
• 8-bit Timers  
This mode can be selected by setting “00” to the timer X  
operating mode bits (bits 1 and 0) and the timer Y operating  
mode bits (bits 5 and 4) of the timer XY mode register (address  
002316).  
The 3803 group (Spec.L) has four 8-bit timers: timer 1, timer 2,  
timer X, and timer Y.  
The timer 1 and timer 2 use one prescaler in common, and the  
timer X and timer Y use each prescaler. Those are 8-bit  
prescalers. Each of the timers and prescalers has a timer latch or  
a prescaler latch.  
• Explanation of operation  
The division ratio of each timer or prescaler is given by 1/(n + 1),  
where n is the value in the corresponding timer or prescaler latch.  
All timers are down-counters. When the timer reaches “0016”, an  
underflow occurs at the next count pulse and the contents of the  
corresponding timer latch are reloaded into the timer and the  
count is continued. When the timer underflows, the interrupt  
request bit corresponding to that timer is set to “1”.  
The timer count operation is started by setting “0” to the timer X  
count stop bit (bit 3) and the timer Y count stop bit (bit 7) of the  
timer XY mode register (address 002316).  
When the timer reaches “0016”, an underflow occurs at the next  
count pulse and the contents of timer latch are reloaded into the  
timer and the count is continued.  
(2) Pulse Output Mode  
• Timer divider  
• Mode selection  
The divider count source is switched by the main clock division  
ratio selection bits of CPU mode register (bits 7 and 6 at address  
003B16). When these bits are “00” (high-speed mode) or “01”  
(middle-speed mode), XIN is selected. When these bits are “10”  
(low-speed mode), XCIN is selected.  
This mode can be selected by setting “01” to the timer X  
operating mode bits (bits 1 and 0) and the timer Y operating  
mode bits (bits 5 and 4) of the timer XY mode register (address  
002316).  
• Explanation of operation  
• Prescaler 12  
The operation is the same as the timer mode’s. Moreover the  
pulse which is inverted each time the timer underflows is output  
from CNTR0/CNTR1 pin. Regardless of the timer counting or  
not the output of CNTR0/CNTR1 pin is initialized to the level of  
specified by their active edge switch bits when writing to the  
timer. When the CNTR0 active edge switch bit (bit 2) and the  
CNTR1 active edge switch bit (bit 6) of the timer XY mode  
register (address 002316) is “0”, the output starts with “H” level.  
When it is “1”, the output starts with “L” level.  
The prescaler 12 counts the output of the timer divider. The  
count source is selected by the timer 12, X count source selection  
register among 1/2, 1/4, 1/8, 1/16, 1/32, 1/64, 1/128, 1/256,  
1/512, 1/1024 of f(XIN) or f(XCIN).  
• Timer 1 and Timer 2  
The timer 1 and timer 2 counts the output of prescaler 12 and  
periodically set the interrupt request bit.  
Switching the CNTR0 or CNTR1 active edge switch bit will  
reverse the output level of the corresponding CNTR0 or CNTR1  
pin.  
• Prescaler X and prescaler Y  
The prescaler X and prescaler Y count the output of the timer  
divider or f(XCIN). The count source is selected by the timer 12,  
X count source selection register (address 000E16) and the timer  
Y, Z count source selection register (address 000F16) among 1/2,  
1/4, 1/8, 1/16, 1/32, 1/64, 1/128, 1/256, 1/512, and 1/1024 of  
f(XIN) or f(XCIN); and f(XCIN).  
• Precautions  
Set the double-function port of CNTR0/CNTR1 pin and port  
P54/P55 to output in this mode.  
• Timer X and Timer Y  
(3) Event Counter Mode  
The timer X and timer Y can each select one of four operating  
modes by setting the timer XY mode register (address 002316).  
• Mode selection  
This mode can be selected by setting “10” to the timer X  
operating mode bits (bits 1 and 0) and the timer Y operating  
mode bits (bits 5 and 4) of the timer XY mode register (address  
002316).  
• Explanation of operation  
The operation is the same as the timer mode’s except that the  
timer counts signals input from the CNTR0 or CNTR1 pin. The  
valid edge for the count operation depends on the CNTR0 active  
edge switch bit (bit 2) or the CNTR1 active edge switch bit (bit 6)  
of the timer XY mode register (address 002316). When it is “0”,  
the rising edge is valid. When it is “1”, the falling edge is valid.  
• Precautions  
Set the double-function port of CNTR0/CNTR1 pin and port  
P54/P55 to input in this mode.  
Rev.1.00 Apr 2, 2007  
REJ03B0212-0100  
Page 30 of 117  
3803 Group (Spec.L)  
(4) Pulse Width Measurement Mode  
• Mode selection  
This mode can be selected by setting “11” to the timer X  
operating mode bits (bits 1 and 0) and the timer Y operating  
mode bits (bits 5 and 4) of the timer XY mode register (address  
002316).  
• Explanation of operation  
When the CNTR0 active edge switch bit (bit 2) or the CNTR1  
active edge switch bit (bit 6) of the timer XY mode register  
(address 002316) is “1”, the timer counts during the term of one  
falling edge of CNTR0/CNTR1 pin input until the next rising  
edge of input (“L” term). When it is “0”, the timer counts during  
the term of one rising edge input until the next falling edge input  
(“H” term).  
• Precautions  
Set the double-function port of CNTR0/CNTR1 pin and port  
P54/P55 to input in this mode.  
The count operation can be stopped by setting “1” to the timer X  
count stop bit (bit 3) and the timer Y count stop bit (bit 7) of the  
timer XY mode register (address 002316). The interrupt request  
bit is set to “1” each time the timer underflows.  
• Precautions when switching count source  
When switching the count source by the timer 12, X and Y count  
source selection bits, the value of timer count is altered in  
inconsiderable amount owing to generating of thin pulses on the  
count input signals.  
Therefore, select the timer count source before setting the value  
to the prescaler and the timer.  
Rev.1.00 Apr 2, 2007  
REJ03B0212-0100  
Page 31 of 117  
3803 Group (Spec.L)  
XIN  
“00”  
“11”  
(1/2, 1/4, 1/8, 1/16, 1/32, 1/64, 1/128, 1/256, 1/512, 1/1024)  
Divider  
Count source  
selection bit  
“10”  
XCIN  
Data bus  
Main clock  
division ratio  
selection bits  
Timer X latch (8)  
Timer X (8)  
Prescaler X latch (8)  
f(XCIN)  
Pulse width  
measurement  
mode  
Timer mode  
Pulse output mode  
To timer X interrupt  
request bit  
Prescaler X (8)  
Timer X count stop bit  
CNTR0 active  
edge switch bit  
Event  
counter  
mode  
P54/CNTR0  
“0”  
To CNTR0 interrupt  
request bit  
“1”  
CNTR0 active  
edge switch bit  
“1”  
“0”  
Q
Q
T
Toggle flip-flop  
R
Port P54  
latch  
Timer X latch write pulse  
Pulse output mode  
Port P54  
direction register  
Pulse output mode  
Data bus  
Count source selection bit  
Clock for timer Y  
f(XCIN)  
Prescaler Y latch (8)  
Timer Y latch (8)  
Timer Y (8)  
Pulse width  
measurement  
mode  
Timer mode  
Pulse output mode  
To timer Y interrupt  
request bit  
Prescaler Y (8)  
Timer Y count stop bit  
CNTR1 active  
edge switch bit  
Event  
counter  
mode  
P55/CNTR1  
“0”  
To CNTR1 interrupt  
request bit  
“1”  
CNTR1 active  
edge switch bit  
“1”  
“0”  
Q
Q
T
Toggle flip-flop  
R
Port P55  
latch  
Timer Y latch write pulse  
Pulse output mode  
Port P55  
direction register  
Pulse output mode  
Data bus  
Prescaler 12 latch (8)  
Prescaler 12 (8)  
Timer 1 latch (8)  
Timer 1 (8)  
Timer 2 latch (8)  
Timer 2 (8)  
To timer 2 interrupt  
request bit  
Clock for timer 12  
To timer 1 interrupt  
request bit  
Fig 25. Block diagram of timer X, timer Y, timer 1, and timer 2  
Rev.1.00 Apr 2, 2007  
REJ03B0212-0100  
Page 32 of 117  
3803 Group (Spec.L)  
b7  
b0  
Timer XY mode register  
(TM : address 002316)  
Timer X operating mode bits  
b1 b0  
0 0: Timer mode  
0 1: Pulse output mode  
1 0: Event counter mode  
1 1: Pulse width measurement mode  
CNTR0 active edge switch bit  
0: Interrupt at falling edge  
Count at rising edge in event counter mode  
1: Interrupt at rising edge  
Count at falling edge in event counter mode  
Timer X count stop bit  
0: Count start  
1: Count stop  
Timer Y operating mode bits  
b5 b4  
0 0: Timer mode  
0 1: Pulse output mode  
1 0: Event counter mode  
1 1: Pulse width measurement mode  
CNTR1 active edge switch bit  
0: Interrupt at falling edge  
Count at rising edge in event counter mode  
1: Interrupt at rising edge  
Count at falling edge in event counter mode  
Timer Y count stop bit  
0: Count start  
1: Count stop  
Fig 26. Structure of timer XY mode register  
Rev.1.00 Apr 2, 2007  
REJ03B0212-0100  
Page 33 of 117  
3803 Group (Spec.L)  
b7  
b0  
Timer 12, X count source selection register  
(T12XCSS : address 000E16)  
Timer 12 count source selection bits  
b3 b2 b1 b0  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0 0 0 : f(XIN)/2 or f(XCIN)/2  
0 0 1 : f(XIN)/4 or f(XCIN)/4  
0 1 0 : f(XIN)/8 or f(XCIN)/8  
0 1 1 : f(XIN)/16 or f(XCIN)/16  
1 0 0 : f(XIN)/32 or f(XCIN)/32  
1 0 1 : f(XIN)/64 or f(XCIN)/64  
1 1 0 : f(XIN)/128 or f(XCIN)/128  
1 1 1 : f(XIN)/256 or f(XCIN)/256  
0 0 0 : f(XIN)/512 or f(XCIN)/512  
0 0 1 : f(XIN)/1024 or f(XCIN)/1024  
1 0 1 0 :  
1 0 1 1 :  
1 1 0 0 :  
1 1 0 1 :  
1 1 1 0 :  
1 1 1 1 :  
Not used  
Timer X count source selection bits  
b7 b6 b5 b4  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
0 0 0 : f(XIN)/2 or f(XCIN)/2  
0 0 1 : f(XIN)/4 or f(XCIN)/4  
0 1 0 : f(XIN)/8 or f(XCIN)/8  
0 1 1 : f(XIN)/16 or f(XCIN)/16  
1 0 0 : f(XIN)/32 or f(XCIN)/32  
1 0 1 : f(XIN)/64 or f(XCIN)/64  
1 1 0 : f(XIN)/128 or f(XCIN)/128  
1 1 1 : f(XIN)/256 or f(XCIN)/256  
0 0 0 : f(XIN)/512 or f(XCIN)/512  
0 0 1 : f(XIN)/1024 or f(XCIN)/1024  
0 1 0 : f(XCIN)  
1 0 1 1 :  
1 1 0 0 :  
1 1 0 1 :  
1 1 1 0 :  
1 1 1 1 :  
Not used  
b7  
b0  
Timer Y, Z count source selection register  
(TYZCSS : address 000F16)  
Timer Y count source selection bits  
b3 b2 b1 b0  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
0 0 0 : f(XIN)/2 or f(XCIN)/2  
0 0 1 : f(XIN)/4 or f(XCIN)/4  
0 1 0 : f(XIN)/8 or f(XCIN)/8  
0 1 1 : f(XIN)/16 or f(XCIN)/16  
1 0 0 : f(XIN)/32 or f(XCIN)/32  
1 0 1 : f(XIN)/64 or f(XCIN)/64  
1 1 0 : f(XIN)/128 or f(XCIN)/128  
1 1 1 : f(XIN)/256 or f(XCIN)/256  
0 0 0 : f(XIN)/512 or f(XCIN)/512  
0 0 1 : f(XIN)/1024 or f(XCIN)/1024  
0 1 0 : f(XCIN)  
1 0 1 1 :  
1 1 0 0 :  
1 1 0 1 :  
1 1 1 0 :  
1 1 1 1 :  
Not used  
Timer Z count source selection bits  
b7 b6 b5 b4  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
0 0 0 : f(XIN)/2 or f(XCIN)/2  
0 0 1 : f(XIN)/4 or f(XCIN)/4  
0 1 0 : f(XIN)/8 or f(XCIN)/8  
0 1 1 : f(XIN)/16 or f(XCIN)/16  
1 0 0 : f(XIN)/32 or f(XCIN)/32  
1 0 1 : f(XIN)/64 or f(XCIN)/64  
1 1 0 : f(XIN)/128 or f(XCIN)/128  
1 1 1 : f(XIN)/256 or f(XCIN)/256  
0 0 0 : f(XIN)/512 or f(XCIN)/512  
0 0 1 : f(XIN)/1024 or f(XCIN)/1024  
0 1 0 : f(XCIN)  
1 0 1 1 :  
1 1 0 0 :  
1 1 0 1 :  
1 1 1 0 :  
1 1 1 1 :  
Not used  
Fig 27. Structure of timer 12, X and timer Y, Z count source selection registers  
Rev.1.00 Apr 2, 2007  
REJ03B0212-0100  
Page 34 of 117  
3803 Group (Spec.L)  
• 16-bit Timer  
(2) Event counter mode  
The timer Z is a 16-bit timer. When the timer reaches “000016”,  
an underflow occurs at the next count pulse and the  
corresponding timer latch is reloaded into the timer and the count  
is continued. When the timer underflows, the interrupt request bit  
corresponding to the timer Z is set to “1”.  
• Mode selection  
This mode can be selected by setting “000” to the timer Z  
operating mode bits (bits 2 to 0) and setting “1” to the  
timer/event counter mode switch bit (bit 7) of the timer Z mode  
register (address 002A16).  
When reading/writing to the timer Z, perform reading/writing to  
both the high-order byte and the low-order byte. When reading  
the timer Z, read from the high-order byte first, followed by the  
low-order byte. Do not perform the writing to the timer Z  
between read operation of the high-order byte and read operation  
of the low-order byte. When writing to the timer Z, write to the  
low-order byte first, followed by the high-order byte. Do not  
perform the reading to the timer Z between write operation of the  
low-order byte and write operation of the high-order byte.  
The timer Z can select the count source by the timer Z count  
source selection bits of timer Y, Z count source selection register  
(bits 7 to 4 at address 000F16).  
The valid edge for the count operation depends on the CNTR2  
active edge switch bit (bit 5) of the timer Z mode register  
(address 002A16). When it is “0”, the rising edge is valid. When  
it is “1”, the falling edge is valid.  
• Interrupt  
The interrupt at an underflow is the same as the timer mode’s.  
• Explanation of operation  
The operation is the same as the timer mode’s.  
Set the double-function port of CNTR2 pin and port P47 to input  
in this mode.  
Figure 30 shows the timing chart of the timer/event counter  
mode.  
Timer Z can select one of seven operating modes by setting the  
timer Z mode register (address 002A16).  
(1) Timer mode  
(3) Pulse output mode  
• Mode selection  
• Mode selection  
This mode can be selected by setting “000” to the timer Z  
operating mode bits (bits 2 to 0) and setting “0” to the  
timer/event counter mode switch bit (b7) of the timer Z mode  
register (address 002A16).  
This mode can be selected by setting “001” to the timer Z  
operating mode bits (bits 2 to 0) and setting “0” to the  
timer/event counter mode switch bit (b7) of the timer Z mode  
register (address 002A16).  
• Count source selection  
• Count source selection  
In high- or middle-speed mode, 1/2, 1/4, 1/8, 1/16, 1/32, 1/64,  
1/128, 1/256, 1/512 or 1/1024 of f(XIN); or f(XCIN) can be  
selected as the count source.  
In low-speed mode, 1/2, 1/4, 1/8, 1/16, 1/32, 1/64, 1/128, 1/256,  
1/512 or 1/1024 of f(XCIN); or f(XCIN) can be selected as the  
count source.  
In high- or middle-speed mode, 1/2, 1/4, 1/8, 1/16, 1/32, 1/64,  
1/128, 1/256, 1/512 or 1/1024 of f(XIN); or f(XCIN) can be  
selected as the count source.  
In low-speed mode, 1/2, 1/4, 1/8, 1/16, 1/32, 1/64, 1/128, 1/256,  
1/512 or 1/1024 of f(XCIN); or f(XCIN) can be selected as the  
count source.  
• Interrupt  
• Interrupt  
When an underflow occurs, the INT0/timer Z interrupt request bit  
(bit 0) of the interrupt request register 1 (address 003C16) is set to  
“1”.  
The interrupt at an underflow is the same as the timer mode’s.  
• Explanation of operation  
The operation is the same as the timer mode’s. Moreover the  
pulse which is inverted each time the timer underflows is output  
from CNTR2 pin. When the CNTR2 active edge switch bit (bit 5)  
of the timer Z mode register (address 002A16) is “0”, the output  
starts with “H” level. When it is “1”, the output starts with “L”  
level.  
• Explanation of operation  
During timer stop, usually write data to a latch and a timer at the  
same time to set the timer value.  
The timer count operation is started by setting “0” to the timer Z  
count stop bit (bit 6) of the timer Z mode register (address  
002A16).  
When the timer reaches “000016”, an underflow occurs at the  
next count pulse and the contents of timer latch are reloaded into  
the timer and the count is continued.  
When writing data to the timer during operation, the data is  
written only into the latch. Then the new latch value is reloaded  
into the timer at the next underflow.  
• Precautions  
The double-function port of CNTR2 pin and port P47 is  
automatically set to the timer pulse output port in this mode.  
The output from CNTR2 pin is initialized to the level depending  
on CNTR2 active edge switch bit by writing to the timer.  
When the value of the CNTR2 active edge switch bit is changed,  
the output level of CNTR2 pin is inverted.  
Figure 31 shows the timing chart of the pulse output mode.  
Rev.1.00 Apr 2, 2007  
REJ03B0212-0100  
Page 35 of 117  
3803 Group (Spec.L)  
(4) Pulse period measurement mode  
(5) Pulse width measurement mode  
• Mode selection  
• Mode selection  
This mode can be selected by setting “010” to the timer Z  
operating mode bits (bits 2 to 0) and setting “0” to the  
timer/event counter mode switch bit (b7) of the timer Z mode  
register (address 002A16).  
This mode can be selected by setting “011” to the timer Z  
operating mode bits (bits 2 to 0) and setting “0” to the  
timer/event counter mode switch bit (b7) of the timer Z mode  
register (address 002A16).  
• Count source selection  
• Count source selection  
In high- or middle-speed mode, 1/2, 1/4, 1/8, 1/16, 1/32, 1/64,  
1/128, 1/256, 1/512 or 1/1024 of f(XIN); or f(XCIN) can be  
selected as the count source.  
In high- or middle-speed mode, 1/2, 1/4, 1/8, 1/16, 1/32, 1/64,  
1/128, 1/256, 1/512 or 1/1024 of f(XIN); or f(XCIN) can be  
selected as the count source.  
In low-speed mode, 1/2, 1/4, 1/8, 1/16, 1/32, 1/64, 1/128, 1/256,  
1/512 or 1/1024 of f(XCIN); or f(XCIN) can be selected as the  
count source.  
In low-speed mode, 1/2, 1/4, 1/8, 1/16, 1/32, 1/64, 1/128, 1/256,  
1/512 or 1/1024 of f(XCIN); or f(XCIN) can be selected as the  
count source.  
• Interrupt  
• Interrupt  
The interrupt at an underflow is the same as the timer mode’s.  
When the pulse period measurement is completed, the  
INT4/CNTR2 interrupt request bit (bit 5) of the interrupt request  
register 2 (address 003D16) is set to “1”.  
The interrupt at an underflow is the same as the timer mode’s.  
When the pulse widths measurement is completed, the  
INT4/CNTR2 interrupt request bit (bit 5) of the interrupt request  
register 2 (address 003D16) is set to “1”.  
• Explanation of operation  
• Explanation of operation  
The cycle of the pulse which is input from the CNTR2 pin is  
measured. When the CNTR2 active edge switch bit (bit 5) of the  
timer Z mode register (address 002A16) is “0”, the timer counts  
during the term from one falling edge of CNTR2 pin input to the  
next falling edge. When it is “1”, the timer counts during the  
term from one rising edge input to the next rising edge input.  
When the valid edge of measurement completion/start is  
detected, the 1’s complement of the timer value is written to the  
timer latch and “FFFF16” is set to the timer.  
Furthermore when the timer underflows, the timer Z interrupt  
request occurs and “FFFF16” is set to the timer. When reading  
the timer Z, the value of the timer latch (measured value) is read.  
The measured value is retained until the next measurement  
completion.  
The pulse width which is input from the CNTR2 pin is measured.  
When the CNTR2 active edge switch bit (bit 5) of the timer Z  
mode register (address 002A16) is “0”, the timer counts during  
the term from one rising edge input to the next falling edge input  
(“H” term). When it is “1”, the timer counts during the term from  
one falling edge of CNTR2 pin input to the next rising edge of  
input (“L” term).  
When the valid edge of measurement completion is detected, the  
1’s complement of the timer value is written to the timer latch.  
When the valid edge of measurement completion/start is  
detected, “FFFF16” is set to the timer.  
When the timer Z underflows, the timer Z interrupt occurs and  
“FFFF16” is set to the timer Z. When reading the timer Z, the  
value of the timer latch (measured value) is read. The measured  
value is retained until the next measurement completion.  
• Precautions  
• Precautions  
Set the double-function port of CNTR2 pin and port P47 to input  
in this mode.  
A read-out of timer value is impossible in this mode. The timer  
can be written to only during timer stop (no measurement of  
pulse period).  
Since the timer latch in this mode is specialized for the read-out  
of measured values, do not perform any write operation during  
measurement.  
“FFFF16” is set to the timer when the timer underflows or when  
the valid edge of measurement start/completion is detected.  
Consequently, the timer value at start of pulse period  
measurement depends on the timer value just before  
measurement start.  
Set the double-function port of CNTR2 pin and port P47 to input  
in this mode.  
A read-out of timer value is impossible in this mode. The timer  
can be written to only during timer stop (no measurement of  
pulse widths).  
Since the timer latch in this mode is specialized for the read-out  
of measured values, do not perform any write operation during  
measurement.  
“FFFF16” is set to the timer when the timer underflows or when  
the valid edge of measurement start/completion is detected.  
Consequently, the timer value at start of pulse width  
measurement depends on the timer value just before  
measurement start.  
Figure 32 shows the timing chart of the pulse period  
measurement mode.  
Figure 33 shows the timing chart of the pulse width measurement  
mode.  
Rev.1.00 Apr 2, 2007  
REJ03B0212-0100  
Page 36 of 117  
3803 Group (Spec.L)  
(6) Programmable waveform generating mode  
2. “L” one-shot pulse; Bit 5 of timer Z mode register = “1”  
The output level of the CNTR2 pin is initialized to “H” at  
mode selection. When trigger generation (input signal to  
INT1 pin) is detected, “L” is output from the CNTR2 pin.  
When an underflow occurs, “H” is output. The “L” one-shot  
pulse width is set by the setting value to the timer Z low-  
order and high-order. When trigger generating is detected  
during timer count stop, although “L” is output from the  
CNTR2 pin, “L” output state continues because an under-  
flow does not occur.  
• Mode selection  
This mode can be selected by setting “100” to the timer Z  
operating mode bits (bits 2 to 0) and setting “0” to the  
timer/event counter mode switch bit (b7) of the timer Z mode  
register (address 002A16).  
• Count source selection  
In high- or middle-speed mode, 1/2, 1/4, 1/8, 1/16, 1/32, 1/64,  
1/128, 1/256, 1/512 or 1/1024 of f(XIN); or f(XCIN) can be  
selected as the count source.  
In low-speed mode, 1/2, 1/4, 1/8, 1/16, 1/32, 1/64, 1/128, 1/256,  
1/512 or 1/1024 of f(XCIN); or f(XCIN) can be selected as the  
count source.  
• Precautions  
Set the double-function port of INT1 pin and port P42 to input in  
this mode.  
The double-function port of CNTR2 pin and port P47 is  
automatically set to the programmable one-shot generating port  
in this mode.  
• Interrupt  
The interrupt at an underflow is the same as the timer mode’s.  
This mode cannot be used in low-speed mode.  
If the value of the CNTR2 active edge switch bit is changed  
during one-shot generating enabled or generating one-shot pulse,  
then the output level from CNTR2 pin changes.  
Figure 35 shows the timing chart of the programmable one-shot  
generating mode.  
• Explanation of operation  
The operation is the same as the timer mode’s. Moreover the  
timer outputs the data set in the output level latch (bit 4) of the  
timer Z mode register (address 002A16) from the CNTR2 pin  
each time the timer underflows.  
Changing the value of the output level latch and the timer latch  
after an underflow makes it possible to output an optional  
waveform from the CNTR2 pin.  
<Notes regarding all modes>  
• Timer Z write control  
Which write control can be selected by the timer Z write control  
bit (bit 3) of the timer Z mode register (address 002A16), writing  
data to both the latch and the timer at the same time or writing  
data only to the latch.  
When the operation “writing data only to the latch” is selected,  
the value is set to the timer latch by writing data to the address of  
timer Z and the timer is updated at next underflow. After reset  
release, the operation “writing data to both the latch and the timer  
at the same time” is selected, and the value is set to both the latch  
and the timer at the same time by writing data to the address of  
timer Z.  
• Precautions  
The double-function port of CNTR2 pin and port P47 is  
automatically set to the programmable waveform generating port  
in this mode.  
Figure 34 shows the timing chart of the programmable waveform  
generating mode.  
(7) Programmable one-shot generating mode  
• Mode selection  
This mode can be selected by setting “101” to the timer Z  
operating mode bits (bits 2 to 0) and setting “0” to the  
timer/event counter mode switch bit (b7) of the timer Z mode  
register (address 002A16).  
In the case of writing data only to the latch, if writing data to the  
latch and an underflow are performed almost at the same time,  
the timer value may become undefined.  
• Timer Z read control  
• Count source selection  
A read-out of timer value is impossible in pulse period  
measurement mode and pulse width measurement mode. In the  
other modes, a read-out of timer value is possible regardless of  
count operating or stopped.  
In high- or middle-speed mode, 1/2, 1/4, 1/8, 1/16, 1/32, 1/64,  
1/128, 1/256, 1/512 or 1/1024 of f(XIN); or f(XCIN) can be  
selected as the count source.  
However, a read-out of timer latch value is impossible.  
• Interrupt  
The interrupt at an underflow is the same as the timer mode’s.  
The trigger to generate one-shot pulse can be selected by the INT1  
active edge selection bit (bit 1) of the interrupt edge selection  
register (address 003A16). When it is “0”, the falling edge active is  
selected; when it is “1”, the rising edge active is selected.  
When the valid edge of the INT1 pin is detected, the INT1  
interrupt request bit (bit 1) of the interrupt request register 1  
(address 003C16) is set to “1”.  
• Switch of interrupt active edge of CNTR2 and INT1  
Each interrupt active edge depends on setting of the CNTR2  
active edge switch bit and the INT1 active edge selection bit.  
• Switch of count source  
When switching the count source by the timer Z count source  
selection bits, the value of timer count is altered in  
inconsiderable amount owing to generating of thin pulses on the  
count input signals.  
Therefore, select the timer count source before setting the value  
to the prescaler and the timer.  
• Explanation of operation  
1. “H” one-shot pulse; Bit 5 of timer Z mode register = “0”  
The output level of the CNTR2 pin is initialized to “L” at  
mode selection. When trigger generation (input signal to  
INT1 pin) is detected, “H” is output from the CNTR2 pin.  
When an underflow occurs, “L” is output. The “H” one-shot  
pulse width is set by the setting value to the timer Z register  
low-order and high-order. When trigger generating is  
detected during timer count stop, although “H” is output  
from the CNTR2 pin, “H” output state continues because an  
underflow does not occur.  
• Usage of CNTR2 pin as normal I/O port P47  
To use the CNTR2 pin as normal I/O port P47, set timer Z  
operating mode bits (b2, b1, b0) of timer Z mode register  
(address 002A16) to “000”.  
Rev.1.00 Apr 2, 2007  
REJ03B0212-0100  
Page 37 of 117  
3803 Group (Spec.L)  
CNTR2 active edge  
switch bit  
Data bus  
Programmable one-shot  
“1”  
generating mode  
P42/INT1  
Programmable one-shot  
generating circuit  
Programmable one-shot  
generating mode  
“0”  
To INT1 interrupt  
request bit  
Programmable waveform  
generating mode  
D
T
Output level latch  
Q
Pulse output mode  
CNTR2 active edge switch bit  
“0”  
S
Q
Q
T
Pulse output mode  
“1”  
“001”  
“100”  
“101”  
Timer Z operating  
mode bits  
Timer Z low-order latch Timer Z high-order latch  
Timer Z low-order Timer Z high-order  
To timer Z interrupt  
request bit  
Port P47  
latch  
Port P47  
direction register  
Pulse period measurement mode  
Pulse width measurement mode  
Edge detection circuit  
To CNTR2 interrupt  
request bit  
“1”  
“1”  
P47/SRDY2/  
CNTR2  
f(XCIN)  
“0”  
CNTR2 active edge  
switch bit  
“0”  
Timer Z count stop bit  
Timer/Event  
counter mode  
switch bit  
XIN  
Count source  
selection bit  
Divider  
(1/2, 1/4, 1/8, 1/16, 1/32, 1/64, 1/128, 1/256, 1/512, 1/1024)  
XCIN  
Fig 28. Block diagram of timer Z  
Rev.1.00 Apr 2, 2007  
REJ03B0212-0100  
Page 38 of 117  
3803 Group (Spec.L)  
b7  
b0  
Timer Z mode register  
(TZM : address 002A16)  
Timer Z operating mode bits  
b2 b1 b0  
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0 : Timer/Event counter mode  
1 : Pulse output mode  
0 : Pulse period measurement mode  
1 : Pulse width measurement mode  
0 : Programmable waveform generating mode  
1 : Programmable one-shot generating mode  
0 : Not available  
1 : Not available  
Timer Z write control bit  
0 : Writing data to both latch and timer simultaneously  
1 : Writing data only to latch  
Output level latch  
0 : “L” output  
1 : “H” output  
CNTR2 active edge switch bit  
0 : Event counter mode: Count at rising edge  
Pulse output mode: Start outputting “H”  
Pulse period measurement mode: Measurement between two falling edges  
Pulse width measurement mode: Measurement of “H” term  
Programmable one-shot generating mode: After start outputting “L”,  
“H” one-shot pulse generated  
Interrupt at falling edge  
1 : Event counter mode: Count at falling edge  
Pulse output mode: Start outputting “L”  
Pulse period measurement mode: Measurement between two rising edges  
Pulse width measurement mode: Measurement of “L” term  
Programmable one-shot generating mode: After start outputting “H”,  
“L” one-shot pulse generated  
Interrupt at rising edge  
Timer Z count stop bit  
0 : Count start  
1 : Count stop  
Timer/Event counter mode switch bit(1)  
0 : Timer mode  
1 : Event counter mode  
Note 1: When selecting the modes except the timer/event counter mode, set “0” to this bit.  
Fig 29. Structure of timer Z mode register  
Rev.1.00 Apr 2, 2007  
REJ03B0212-0100  
Page 39 of 117  
3803 Group (Spec.L)  
FFFF16  
TL  
000016  
TR  
TR  
TR  
TL : Value set to timer latch  
TR : Timer interrupt request  
Fig 30. Timing chart of timer/event counter mode  
FFFF16  
TL  
000016  
TR  
TR  
TR  
TR  
Waveform output  
from CNTR2 pin  
CNTR2  
CNTR2  
TL : Value set to timer latch  
TR : Timer interrupt request  
CNTR2 : CNTR2 interrupt request  
(CNTR2 active edge switch bit = “0”; Falling edge active)  
Fig 31. Timing chart of pulse output mode  
Rev.1.00 Apr 2, 2007  
REJ03B0212-0100  
Page 40 of 117  
3803 Group (Spec.L)  
000016  
T3  
T2  
T1  
FFFF16  
TR  
TR  
FFFF16 + T1  
T2  
T3  
FFFF16  
Signal input from  
CNTR2 pin  
CNTR2 CNTR2  
CNTR2  
CNTR2  
CNTR2 of rising edge active  
TR : Timer interrupt request  
CNTR2 : CNTR2 interrupt request  
Fig 32. Timing chart of pulse period measurement mode (Measuring term between two rising edges)  
000016  
T3  
T2  
T1  
FFFF16  
TR  
FFFF16 + T2  
T3  
T1  
Signal input from  
CNTR2 pin  
CNTR2  
CNTR2  
CNTR2  
CNTR2 interrupt of rising edge active; Measurement of “L” width  
TR : Timer interrupt request  
CNTR2 : CNTR2 interrupt request  
Fig 33. Timing chart of pulse width measurement mode (Measuring “L” term)  
Rev.1.00 Apr 2, 2007  
REJ03B0212-0100  
Page 41 of 117  
3803 Group (Spec.L)  
FFFF16  
T3  
L
T2  
T1  
000016  
Signal output from  
CNTR2 pin  
L
T3  
T1  
T2  
TR  
TR  
CNTR2  
TR  
TR  
CNTR2  
L : Timer initial value  
TR : Timer interrupt request  
CNTR2 : CNTR2 interrupt request  
(CNTR2 active edge switch bit = “0”; Falling edge active)  
Fig 34. Timing chart of programmable waveform generating mode  
FFFF16  
L
TR  
TR  
TR  
Signal input from  
INT1 pin  
Signal output from  
CNTR2 pin  
L
L
L
CNTR2  
CNTR2  
L : One-shot pulse width  
TR : Timer interrupt request  
CNTR2 : CNTR2 interrupt request  
(CNTR2 active edge switch bit = “0”; Falling edge active)  
Fig 35. Timing chart of programmable one-shot generating mode (“H” one-shot pulse generating)  
Rev.1.00 Apr 2, 2007  
REJ03B0212-0100  
Page 42 of 117  
3803 Group (Spec.L)  
SERIAL INTERFACE  
(1) Clock Synchronous Serial I/O Mode  
Clock synchronous serial I/O1 mode can be selected by setting  
the serial I/O1 mode selection bit of the serial I/O1 control  
register (bit 6 of address 001A16) to “1”.  
For clock synchronous serial I/O, the transmitter and the receiver  
must use the same clock. If an internal clock is used, transfer is  
started by a write signal to the transmit/receive buffer register.  
• Serial I/O1  
Serial I/O1 can be used as either clock synchronous or  
asynchronous (UART) serial I/O. A dedicated timer is also  
provided for baud rate generation.  
Data bus  
Serial I/O1 control register  
Address 001A16  
Address 001816  
Receive buffer register 1  
Receive buffer full flag (RBF)  
Receive shift register 1  
Receive interrupt request (RI)  
P44/RXD1  
Shift clock  
Clock control circuit  
P46/SCLK1  
Serial I/O1 synchronous clock selection bit  
Frequency division ratio 1/(n+1)  
BRG count source selection bit  
f(XIN)  
Baud rate generator 1  
Address 001C16  
1/4  
(f(XCIN) in low-speed mode)  
1/4  
Falling-edge detector  
Clock control circuit  
F/F  
P47/SRDY1/CNTR2  
P45/TXD1  
Shift clock  
Transmit shift completion flag (TSC)  
Transmit interrupt source selection bit  
Transmit shift register 1  
Transmit interrupt request (TI)  
Transmit buffer register 1  
Transmit buffer empty flag (TBE)  
Serial I/O1 status register  
Address 001916  
Address 001816  
Data bus  
Fig 36. Block diagram of clock synchronous serial I/O1  
Transfer shift clock  
(1/2 to 1/2048 of the internal  
clock, or an external clock)  
D0  
D0  
D1  
D1  
D2  
D2  
D3  
D3  
D4  
D4  
D5  
D5  
D6  
D6  
D7  
D7  
Serial output TXD1  
Serial input RXD1  
Receive enable signal SRDY1  
Write pulse to receive/transmit  
buffer register 1 (address 001816)  
RBF = 1  
TSC = 1  
Overrun error (OE)  
detection  
TBE = 0  
TBE = 1  
TSC = 0  
Notes 1: As the transmit interrupt (TI), which can be selected, either when the transmit buffer has emptied (TBE=1) or after the transmit  
shift operation has ended (TSC=1), by setting the transmit interrupt source selection bit (TIC) of the serial I/O1 control register.  
2: If data is written to the transmit buffer register when TSC=0, the transmit clock is generated continuously and serial data is output  
continuously from the TXD pin.  
3: The receive interrupt (RI) is set when the receive buffer full flag (RBF) becomes “1”.  
Fig 37. Operation of clock synchronous serial I/O1  
Rev.1.00 Apr 2, 2007  
REJ03B0212-0100  
Page 43 of 117  
3803 Group (Spec.L)  
(2) Asynchronous Serial I/O (UART) Mode  
The transmit and receive shift registers each have a buffer, but  
the two buffers have the same address in a memory. Since the  
shift register cannot be written to or read from directly, transmit  
data is written to the transmit buffer register, and receive data is  
read from the receive buffer register.  
The transmit buffer register can also hold the next data to be  
transmitted, and the receive buffer register can hold a character  
while the next character is being received.  
Clock asynchronous serial I/O mode (UART) can be selected by  
clearing the serial I/O1 mode selection bit (b6) of the serial I/O1  
control register to “0”.  
Eight serial data transfer formats can be selected, and the transfer  
formats used by a transmitter and receiver must be identical.  
Data bus  
Serial I/O1 control register  
Address 001A16  
Address 001816  
Receive buffer register 1  
OE  
Character length selection bit  
Receive buffer full flag (RBF)  
Receive interrupt request (RI)  
ST detector  
P44/RXD1  
7 bits  
8 bits  
Receive shift register 1  
1/16  
UART1 control register  
Address 001B16  
SP detector  
PE FE  
Clock control circuit  
Serial I/O1 synchronous clock selection bit  
P46/SCLK1  
Frequency division ratio 1/(n+1)  
Baud rate generator  
BRG count source selection bit  
1/4  
f(XIN)  
(f(XCIN) in low-speed mode)  
Address 001C16  
ST/SP/PA generator  
1/16  
Transmit shift  
completion flag (TSC)  
Transmit interrupt source selection bit  
Transmit interrupt request (TI)  
P45/TXD1  
Transmit shift register 1  
Character length selection bit  
Transmit buffer empty flag (TBE)  
Serial I/O1 status register  
Transmit buffer register 1  
Address 001816  
Address 001916  
Data bus  
Fig 38. Block diagram of UART serial I/O1  
Transmit or  
receive clock  
Transmit buffer  
write signal  
TBE=0  
TBE=0  
TSC=0  
TBE=1  
TBE=1  
TSC=1*  
ST  
D0  
D1  
SP  
ST  
D0  
D1  
SP  
Serial output  
TXD1  
Generated at 2nd bit in 2-stop-bit mode  
1 start bit  
7 or 8 data bit  
1 or 0 parity bit  
1 or 2 stop bit (s)  
Receive buffer  
read signal  
RBF=0  
RBF=1  
SP  
RBF=1  
SP  
Serial input  
RXD1  
ST  
D0  
D1  
ST  
D0  
D1  
Notes 1: Error flag detection occurs at the same time that the RBF flag becomes “1” (at 1st stop bit, during reception).  
2: As the transmit interrupt (TI), when either the TBE or TSC flag becomes “1”, can be selected to occur depending on the setting of the transmit interrupt source  
selection bit (TIC) of the serial I/O1 control register.  
3: The receive interrupt (RI) is set when the RBF flag becomes “1”.  
4: After data is written to the transmit buffer when TSC=1, 0.5 to 1.5 cycles of the data shift cycle are necessary until changing to TSC=0.  
Fig 39. Operation of UART serial I/O1  
Rev.1.00 Apr 2, 2007  
REJ03B0212-0100  
Page 44 of 117  
3803 Group (Spec.L)  
[Transmit Buffer Register 1/Receive Buffer Register 1  
(TB1/RB1)] 001816  
The transmit buffer register 1 and the receive buffer register 1 are  
located at the same address. The transmit buffer is write-only and  
the receive buffer is read-only. If a character bit length is 7 bits,  
the MSB of data stored in the receive buffer is “0”.  
[Serial I/O1 Status Register (SIO1STS)] 001916  
The read-only serial I/O1 status register consists of seven flags  
(bits 0 to 6) which indicate the operating status of the serial I/O1  
function and various errors.  
Three of the flags (bits 4 to 6) are valid only in UART mode.  
The receive buffer full flag (bit 1) is cleared to “0” when the  
receive buffer register is read.  
If there is an error, it is detected at the same time that data is  
transferred from the receive shift register to the receive buffer  
register, and the receive buffer full flag is set. A write to the  
serial I/O1 status register clears all the error flags OE, PE, FE,  
and SE (bit 3 to bit 6, respectively). Writing “0” to the serial I/O1  
enable bit SIOE (bit 7 of the serial I/O1 control register) also  
clears all the status flags, including the error flags.  
Bits 0 to 6 of the serial I/O1 status register are initialized to “0” at  
reset, but if the transmit enable bit (bit 4) of the serial I/O1  
control register has been set to “1”, the transmit shift completion  
flag (bit 2) and the transmit buffer empty flag (bit 0) become “1”.  
[Serial I/O1 Control Register (SIO1CON)] 001A16  
The serial I/O1 control register consists of eight control bits for  
the serial I/O1 function.  
[UART1 Control Register (UART1CON)] 001B16  
The UART control register consists of four control bits (bits 0 to  
3) which are valid when asynchronous serial I/O is selected and  
set the data format of an data transfer, and one bit (bit 4) which is  
always valid and sets the output structure of the P45/TXD1 pin.  
[Baud Rate Generator 1 (BRG1)] 001C16  
The baud rate generator determines the baud rate for serial  
transfer.  
The baud rate generator divides the frequency of the count source  
by 1/(n + 1), where n is the value written to the baud rate  
generator.  
Rev.1.00 Apr 2, 2007  
REJ03B0212-0100  
Page 45 of 117  
3803 Group (Spec.L)  
b7  
b0  
b7  
b0  
Serial I/O1 status register  
Serial I/O1 control register  
(SIO1STS : address 001916)  
(SIO1CON : address 001A16)  
BRG count source selection bit (CSS)  
0: f(XIN) (f(XCIN) in low-speed mode)  
1: f(XIN)/4 (f(XCIN)/4 in low-speed mode)  
Serial I/O1 synchronous clock selection bit (SCS)  
0: BRG output divided by 4 when clock synchronous  
serial I/O1 is selected, BRG output divided by 16  
when UART is selected.  
1: External clock input when clock synchronous serial  
I/O1 is selected, external clock input divided by 16  
when UART is selected.  
Transmit buffer empty flag (TBE)  
0: Buffer full  
1: Buffer empty  
Receive buffer full flag (RBF)  
0: Buffer empty  
1: Buffer full  
Transmit shift completion flag (TSC)  
0: Transmit shift in progress  
1: Transmit shift completed  
Overrun error flag (OE)  
0: No error  
SRDY1 output enable bit (SRDY)  
0: P47 pin operates as normal I/O pin  
1: P47 pin operates as SRDY1 output pin  
Transmit interrupt source selection bit (TIC)  
0: Interrupt when transmit buffer has emptied  
1: Interrupt when transmit shift operation is completed  
Transmit enable bit (TE)  
1: Overrun error  
Parity error flag (PE)  
0: No error  
1: Parity error  
Framing error flag (FE)  
0: No error  
0: Transmit disabled  
1: Framing error  
1: Transmit enabled  
Receive enable bit (RE)  
0: Receive disabled  
1: Receive enabled  
Summing error flag (SE)  
0: (OE) U (PE) U (FE)=0  
1: (OE) U (PE) U (FE)=1  
Not used (returns “1” when read)  
Serial I/O1 mode selection bit (SIOM)  
0: Clock asynchronous (UART) serial I/O  
1: Clock synchronous serial I/O  
Serial I/O1 enable bit (SIOE)  
0: Serial I/O1 disabled  
(pins P44 to P47 operate as normal I/O pins)  
1: Serial I/O1 enabled  
(pins P44 to P47 operate as serial I/O1 pins)  
b7  
b0  
UART1 control register  
(UART1CON : address 001B16)  
Character length selection bit (CHAS)  
0: 8 bits  
1: 7 bits  
Parity enable bit (PARE)  
0: Parity checking disabled  
1: Parity checking enabled  
Parity selection bit (PARS)  
0: Even parity  
1: Odd parity  
Stop bit length selection bit (STPS)  
0: 1 stop bit  
1: 2 stop bits  
P45/TXD1 P-channel output disable bit (POFF)  
0: CMOS output (in output mode)  
1: N-channel open drain output (in output mode)  
Not used (return “1” when read)  
Fig 40. Structure of serial I/O1 control registers  
Rev.1.00 Apr 2, 2007  
REJ03B0212-0100  
Page 46 of 117  
3803 Group (Spec.L)  
<Notes concerning serial I/O1>  
1. Notes when selecting clock synchronous serial I/O  
1.1 Stop of transmission operation  
2. Notes when selecting clock asynchronous serial I/O  
2.1 Stop of transmission operation  
• Note  
• Note  
Clear the transmit enable bit to “0” (transmit disabled). The  
transmission operation does not stop by clearing the serial  
I/O1 enable bit to “0”.  
Clear the serial I/O1 enable bit and the transmit enable bit to  
“0” (serial I/O and transmit disabled).  
• Reason  
• Reason  
Since transmission is not stopped and the transmission circuit  
is not initialized even if only the serial I/O1 enable bit is  
cleared to “0” (serial I/O disabled), the internal transmission is  
running (in this case, since pins TXD1, RXD1, SCLK1, and  
SRDY1 function as I/O ports, the transmission data is not  
output). When data is written to the transmit buffer register in  
this state, data starts to be shifted to the transmit shift register.  
When the serial I/O1 enable bit is set to “1” at this time, the  
data during internally shifting is output to the TXD1 pin and an  
operation failure occurs.  
Since transmission is not stopped and the transmission circuit  
is not initialized even if only the serial I/O1 enable bit is  
cleared to “0” (serial I/O disabled), the internal transmission is  
running (in this case, since pins TXD1, RXD1, SCLK1, and  
SRDY1 function as I/O ports, the transmission data is not  
output). When data is written to the transmit buffer register in  
this state, data starts to be shifted to the transmit shift register.  
When the serial I/O1 enable bit is set to “1” at this time, the  
data during internally shifting is output to the TXD1 pin and an  
operation failure occurs.  
1.2 Stop of receive operation  
• Note  
2.2 Stop of receive operation  
• Note  
Clear the receive enable bit to “0” (receive disabled), or clear  
the serial I/O1 enable bit to “0” (serial I/O disabled).  
Clear the receive enable bit to “0” (receive disabled).  
2.3 Stop of transmit/receive operation  
• Note 1 (only transmission operation is stopped)  
Clear the transmit enable bit to “0” (transmit disabled). The  
transmission operation does not stop by clearing the serial  
I/O1 enable bit to “0”.  
1.3 Stop of transmit/receive operation  
• Note  
Clear both the transmit enable bit and receive enable bit to “0”  
(transmit and receive disabled).  
(when data is transmitted and received in the clock  
synchronous serial I/O mode, any one of data transmission and  
reception cannot be stopped.)  
• Reason  
Since transmission is not stopped and the transmission circuit  
is not initialized even if only the serial I/O1 enable bit is  
cleared to “0” (serial I/O disabled), the internal transmission is  
running (in this case, since pins TXD1, RXD1, SCLK1, and  
SRDY1 function as I/O ports, the transmission data is not  
output). When data is written to the transmit buffer register in  
this state, data starts to be shifted to the transmit shift register.  
When the serial I/O1 enable bit is set to “1” at this time, the  
data during internally shifting is output to the TXD1 pin and an  
operation failure occurs.  
• Reason  
In the clock synchronous serial I/O mode, the same clock is  
used for transmission and reception. If any one of transmission  
and reception is disabled, a bit error occurs because  
transmission and reception cannot be synchronized.  
In this mode, the clock circuit of the transmission circuit also  
operates for data reception. Accordingly, the transmission  
circuit does not stop by clearing only the transmit enable bit to  
“0” (transmit disabled). Also, the transmission circuit is not  
initialized by clearing the serial I/O1 enable bit to “0” (serial  
I/O disabled) (refer to 1.1).  
• Note 2 (only receive operation is stopped)  
Clear the receive enable bit to “0” (receive disabled).  
Rev.1.00 Apr 2, 2007  
REJ03B0212-0100  
Page 47 of 117  
3803 Group (Spec.L)  
7. Transmit interrupt request when transmit enable bit is set  
• Note  
3. SRDY1 output of reception side  
• Note  
When using the transmit interrupt, take the following  
sequence.  
1. Set the serial I/O1 transmit interrupt enable bit to “0” (dis-  
abled).  
2. Set the transmit enable bit to “1”.  
3. Set the serial I/O1 transmit interrupt request bit to “0” after  
1 or more instruction has executed.  
4. Set the serial I/O1 transmit interrupt enable bit to “1”  
(enabled).  
When signals are output from the SRDY1 pin on the reception  
side by using an external clock in the clock synchronous serial  
I/O mode, set all of the receive enable bit, the SRDY1 output  
enable bit, and the transmit enable bit to “1” (transmit  
enabled).  
4. Setting serial I/O1 control register again  
• Note  
Set the serial I/O1 control register again after the transmission  
and the reception circuits are reset by clearing both the  
transmit enable bit and the receive enable bit to “0”.  
• Reason  
When the transmit enable bit is set to “1”, the transmit buffer  
empty flag and the transmit shift register shift completion flag  
are also set to “1”. Therefore, regardless of selecting which  
timing for the generating of transmit interrupts, the interrupt  
request is generated and the transmit interrupt request bit is set  
at this point.  
Clear both the transmit enable  
bit (TE) and the receive enable  
bit (RE) to “0”  
Set the bits 0 to 3 and bit 6 of  
the serial I/O1 control register  
Can be set with the  
LDM instruction at  
Set both the transmit enable bit  
(TE) and the receive enable bit  
(RE), or one of them to “1”  
the same time  
5.Data transmission control with referring to transmit shift  
register completion flag  
• Note  
After the transmit data is written to the transmit buffer register,  
the transmit shift register completion flag changes from “1” to  
“0” with a delay of 0.5 to 1.5 shift clocks. When data  
transmission is controlled with referring to the flag after  
writing the data to the transmit buffer register, note the delay.  
6. Transmission control when external clock is selected  
• Note  
When an external clock is used as the synchronous clock for  
data transmission, set the transmit enable bit to “1” at “H” of  
the SCLK1 input level. Also, write data to the transmit buffer  
register at “H” of the SCLK1 input level.  
Rev.1.00 Apr 2, 2007  
REJ03B0212-0100  
Page 48 of 117  
3803 Group (Spec.L)  
• Serial I/O2  
The serial I/O2 function can be used only for clock synchronous  
serial I/O.  
b7  
b0  
For clock synchronous serial I/O2, the transmitter and the  
receiver must use the same clock. If the internal clock is used,  
transfer is started by a write signal to the serial I/O2 register  
(address 001F16).  
Serial I/O2 control register  
(SIO2CON : address 001D16)  
Internal synchronous clock selection bits  
b2 b1 b0  
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
0: f(XIN)/8 (f(XCIN)/8 in low-speed mode)  
1: f(XIN)/16 (f(XCIN)/16 in low-speed mode)  
0: f(XIN)/32 (f(XCIN)/32 in low-speed mode)  
1: f(XIN)/64 (f(XCIN)/64 in low-speed mode)  
0: f(XIN)/128 f(XCIN)/128 in low-speed mode)  
1: f(XIN)/256 (f(XCIN)/256 in low-speed mode)  
[Serial I/O2 Control Register (SIO2CON)] 001D16  
The serial I/O2 control register contains eight bits which control  
various serial I/O2 functions.  
Serial I/O2 port selection bit  
0: I/O port  
1: SOUT2, SCLK2 signal output  
SRDY2 output enable bit  
0: I/O port  
1: SRDY2 signal output  
Transfer direction selection bit  
0: LSB first  
1: MSB first  
Serial I/O2 synchronous clock selection bit  
0: External clock  
1: Internal clock  
P51/SOUT2 P-channel output disable bit  
0: CMOS output (in output mode)  
1: N-channel open drain output (in output mode)  
Fig 41. Structure of Serial I/O2 control register  
Internal synchronous  
clock selection bits  
1/8  
1/16  
1/32  
1/64  
Data bus  
f(XIN)  
(f(XCIN) in low-speed mode)  
1/128  
1/256  
P53 latch  
Serial I/O2 synchronous  
clock selection bit  
“0”  
“1”  
P53/SRDY2  
SRDY2 Synchronization  
circuit  
“1”  
SRDY2 output enable bit  
“0”  
External clock  
P52 latch  
“0”  
P52/SCLK2  
Serial I/O2  
interrupt request  
Serial I/O counter 2 (3)  
“1”  
Serial I/O2 port selection bit  
P51 latch  
“0”  
P51/SOUT2  
P50/SIN2  
“1”  
Serial I/O2 port selection bit  
Serial I/O2 register (8)  
Address 001F16  
Fig 42. Block diagram of serial I/O2  
Rev.1.00 Apr 2, 2007  
REJ03B0212-0100  
Page 49 of 117  
3803 Group (Spec.L)  
Transfer clock (1)  
Serial I/O2 register  
write signal  
(2)  
Serial I/O2 output SOUT2  
Serial I/O2 input SIN2  
D0  
D1  
D2  
D3  
D4  
D5  
D6  
D7  
Receive enable signal SRDY2  
Serial I/O2 interrupt request bit set  
Notes1: When the internal clock is selected as the transfer clock, the divide ratio of f(XIN), or (f(XCIN) in low-speed mode, can be selected by  
setting bits 0 to 2 of the serial I/O2 control register.  
2: When the internal clock is selected as the transfer clock, the SOUT2 pin goes to high impedance after transfer completion.  
Fig 43. Timing of serial I/O2  
Rev.1.00 Apr 2, 2007  
REJ03B0212-0100  
Page 50 of 117  
3803 Group (Spec.L)  
• Serial I/O3  
(1) Clock Synchronous Serial I/O Mode  
Serial I/O3 can be used as either clock synchronous or  
asynchronous (UART) serial I/O3. A dedicated timer is also  
provided for baud rate generation.  
Clock synchronous serial I/O3 mode can be selected by setting  
the serial I/O3 mode selection bit of the serial I/O3 control  
register (bit 6 of address 003216) to “1”.  
For clock synchronous serial I/O, the transmitter and the receiver  
must use the same clock. If an internal clock is used, transfer is  
started by a write signal to the transmit/receive buffer register.  
Data bus  
Serial I/O3 control register  
Address 003216  
Address 003016  
Receive buffer register 3  
Receive buffer full flag (RBF)  
Receive shift register 3  
Receive interrupt request (RI)  
P34/RXD3  
Shift clock  
Clock control circuit  
P36/SCLK3  
f(XIN)  
Serial I/O3 synchronous clock selection bit  
Frequency division ratio 1/(n+1)  
BRG count source selection bit  
Baud rate generator 3  
Address 002F16  
1/4  
(f(XCIN) in low-speed mode)  
1/4  
Falling-edge detector  
Clock control circuit  
F/F  
P37/SRDY3  
P35/TXD3  
Shift clock  
Transmit shift completion flag (TSC)  
Transmit interrupt source selection bit  
Transmit shift register 3  
Transmit interrupt request (TI)  
Transmit buffer register 3  
Transmit buffer empty flag (TBE)  
Serial I/O3 status register  
Address 003116  
Address 003016  
Data bus  
Fig 44. Block diagram of clock synchronous serial I/O3  
Transfer shift clock  
(1/2 to 1/2048 of the internal  
clock, or an external clock)  
D0  
D0  
D1  
D1  
D2  
D2  
D3  
D3  
D4  
D4  
D5  
D5  
D6  
D6  
D7  
D7  
Serial output TXD3  
Serial input RXD3  
Receive enable signal SRDY3  
Write pulse to receive/transmit  
buffer register (address 003016)  
RBF = 1  
TSC = 1  
Overrun error (OE)  
detection  
TBE = 0  
TBE = 1  
TSC = 0  
Notes 1: As the transmit interrupt (TI), which can be selected, either when the transmit buffer has emptied (TBE=1) or after the transmit  
shift operation has ended (TSC=1), by setting the transmit interrupt source selection bit (TIC) of the serial I/O3 control register.  
2: If data is written to the transmit buffer register when TSC=0, the transmit clock is generated continuously and serial data is output  
continuously from the TXD pin.  
3: The receive interrupt (RI) is set when the receive buffer full flag (RBF) becomes “1”.  
Fig 45. Operation of clock synchronous serial I/O3  
Rev.1.00 Apr 2, 2007  
REJ03B0212-0100  
Page 51 of 117  
3803 Group (Spec.L)  
(2) Asynchronous Serial I/O (UART) Mode  
The transmit and receive shift registers each have a buffer, but  
the two buffers have the same address in a memory. Since the  
shift register cannot be written to or read from directly, transmit  
data is written to the transmit buffer register, and receive data is  
read from the receive buffer register.  
The transmit buffer register can also hold the next data to be  
transmitted, and the receive buffer register can hold a character  
while the next character is being received.  
Clock asynchronous serial I/O mode (UART) can be selected by  
clearing the serial I/O3 mode selection bit (b6) of the serial I/O3  
control register to “0”.  
Eight serial data transfer formats can be selected, and the transfer  
formats used by a transmitter and receiver must be identical.  
Data bus  
Serial I/O3 control register  
Address 003216  
Address 003016  
Receive buffer register 3  
OE  
Character length selection bit  
Receive buffer full flag (RBF)  
Receive interrupt request (RI)  
ST detector  
P34/RXD3  
7 bits  
8 bits  
Receive shift register 3  
1/16  
UART3 control register  
Address 003316  
SP detector  
PE FE  
Clock control circuit  
Serial I/O3 synchronous clock selection bit  
P36/SCLK3  
Frequency division ratio 1/(n+1)  
Baud rate generator 3  
Address 002F16  
BRG count source selection bit  
1/4  
f(XIN)  
(f(XCIN) in low-speed mode)  
ST/SP/PA generator  
1/16  
Transmit shift  
completion flag (TSC)  
Transmit interrupt source selection bit  
Transmit interrupt request (TI)  
P35/TXD3  
Transmit shift register 3  
Character length selection bit  
Transmit buffer empty flag (TBE)  
Serial I/O3 status register  
Transmit buffer register 3  
Address 003016  
Address 003116  
Data bus  
Fig 46. Block diagram of UART serial I/O3  
Transmit or  
receive clock  
Transmit buffer  
write signal  
TBE=0  
TBE=0  
TSC=0  
TBE=1  
TBE=1  
TSC=1*  
Serial output  
ST  
D0  
D1  
SP  
ST  
D0  
D1  
SP  
TXD3  
1 start bit  
* Generated at 2nd bit in 2-stop-bit mode  
7 or 8 data bit  
1 or 0 parity bit  
1 or 2 stop bit (s)  
Receive buffer  
read signal  
RBF=0  
RBF=1  
SP  
RBF=1  
SP  
Serial input  
RXD3  
ST  
D0  
D1  
ST  
D0  
D1  
Notes 1: Error flag detection occurs at the same time that the RBF flag becomes “1” (at 1st stop bit, during reception).  
2: As the transmit interrupt (TI), when either the TBE or TSC flag becomes “1”, can be selected to occur depending on the setting of the transmit interrupt source  
selection bit (TIC) of the serial I/O3 control register.  
3: The receive interrupt (RI) is set when the RBF flag becomes “1”.  
4: After data is written to the transmit buffer when TSC=1, 0.5 to 1.5 cycles of the data shift cycle are necessary until changing to TSC=0.  
Fig 47. Operation of UART serial I/O3  
Rev.1.00 Apr 2, 2007  
REJ03B0212-0100  
Page 52 of 117  
3803 Group (Spec.L)  
[Transmit Buffer Register 3/Receive Buffer Register 3  
(TB3/RB3)] 003016  
The transmit buffer register 3 and the receive buffer register 3 are  
located at the same address. The transmit buffer is write-only and  
the receive buffer is read-only. If a character bit length is 7 bits,  
the MSB of data stored in the receive buffer is “0”.  
[Serial I/O3 Status Register (SIO3STS)] 003116  
The read-only serial I/O3 status register consists of seven flags  
(bits 0 to 6) which indicate the operating status of the serial I/O3  
function and various errors.  
Three of the flags (bits 4 to 6) are valid only in UART mode.  
The receive buffer full flag (bit 1) is cleared to “0” when the  
receive buffer register is read.  
If there is an error, it is detected at the same time that data is  
transferred from the receive shift register to the receive buffer  
register, and the receive buffer full flag is set. A write to the  
serial I/O3 status register clears all the error flags OE, PE, FE,  
and SE (bit 3 to bit 6, respectively). Writing “0” to the serial I/O3  
enable bit SIOE (bit 7 of the serial I/O3 control register) also  
clears all the status flags, including the error flags.  
Bits 0 to 6 of the serial I/O3 status register are initialized to “0” at  
reset, but if the transmit enable bit (bit 4) of the serial I/O3  
control register has been set to “1”, the transmit shift completion  
flag (bit 2) and the transmit buffer empty flag (bit 0) become “1”.  
[Serial I/O3 Control Register (SIO3CON)] 003216  
The serial I/O3 control register consists of eight control bits for  
the serial I/O3 function.  
[UART3 Control Register (UART3CON)] 003316  
The UART control register consists of four control bits (bits 0 to  
3) which are valid when asynchronous serial I/O is selected and  
set the data format of an data transfer, and one bit (bit 4) which is  
always valid and sets the output structure of the P35/TXD3 pin.  
[Baud Rate Generator 3 (BRG3)] 002F16  
The baud rate generator determines the baud rate for serial  
transfer.  
The baud rate generator divides the frequency of the count source  
by 1/(n + 1), where n is the value written to the baud rate  
generator.  
Rev.1.00 Apr 2, 2007  
REJ03B0212-0100  
Page 53 of 117  
3803 Group (Spec.L)  
b7  
b0  
b7  
b0  
Serial I/O3 status register  
Serial I/O3 control register  
(SIO3STS : address 003116)  
(SIO3CON : address 003216)  
BRG count source selection bit (CSS)  
0: f(XIN) (f(XCIN) in low-speed mode)  
1: f(XIN)/4 (f(XCIN)/4 in low-speed mode)  
Serial I/O3 synchronous clock selection bit (SCS)  
0: BRG output divided by 4 when clock synchronous  
serial I/O3 is selected, BRG output divided by 16  
when UART is selected.  
1: External clock input when clock synchronous serial  
I/O3 is selected, external clock input divided by 16  
when UART is selected.  
Transmit buffer empty flag (TBE)  
0: Buffer full  
1: Buffer empty  
Receive buffer full flag (RBF)  
0: Buffer empty  
1: Buffer full  
Transmit shift completion flag (TSC)  
0: Transmit shift in progress  
1: Transmit shift completed  
Overrun error flag (OE)  
0: No error  
SRDY3 output enable bit (SRDY)  
0: P37 pin operates as normal I/O pin  
1: P37 pin operates as SRDY3 output pin  
Transmit interrupt source selection bit (TIC)  
0: Interrupt when transmit buffer has emptied  
1: Interrupt when transmit shift operation is completed  
Transmit enable bit (TE)  
1: Overrun error  
Parity error flag (PE)  
0: No error  
1: Parity error  
Framing error flag (FE)  
0: No error  
0: Transmit disabled  
1: Framing error  
1: Transmit enabled  
Receive enable bit (RE)  
0: Receive disabled  
1: Receive enabled  
Summing error flag (SE)  
0: (OE) U (PE) U (FE)=0  
1: (OE) U (PE) U (FE)=1  
Not used (returns “1” when read)  
Serial I/O3 mode selection bit (SIOM)  
0: Clock asynchronous (UART) serial I/O  
1: Clock synchronous serial I/O  
Serial I/O3 enable bit (SIOE)  
0: Serial I/O3 disabled  
(pins P34 to P37 operate as normal I/O pins)  
1: Serial I/O3 enabled  
(pins P34 to P37 operate as serial I/O3 pins)  
b7  
b0  
UART3 control register  
(UART3CON : address 003316)  
Character length selection bit (CHAS)  
0: 8 bits  
1: 7 bits  
Parity enable bit (PARE)  
0: Parity checking disabled  
1: Parity checking enabled  
Parity selection bit (PARS)  
0: Even parity  
1: Odd parity  
Stop bit length selection bit (STPS)  
0: 1 stop bit  
1: 2 stop bits  
P35/TXD3 P-channel output disable bit (POFF)  
0: CMOS output (in output mode)  
1: N-channel open drain output (in output mode)  
Not used (return “1” when read)  
Fig 48. Structure of serial I/O3 control registers  
Rev.1.00 Apr 2, 2007  
REJ03B0212-0100  
Page 54 of 117  
3803 Group (Spec.L)  
<Notes concerning serial I/O3>  
1. Notes when selecting clock synchronous serial I/O  
1.1 Stop of transmission operation  
2. Notes when selecting clock asynchronous serial I/O  
2.1 Stop of transmission operation  
• Note  
• Note  
Clear the transmit enable bit to “0” (transmit disabled). The  
transmission operation does not stop by clearing the serial  
I/O3 enable bit to “0”.  
Clear the serial I/O3 enable bit and the transmit enable bit to  
“0” (serial I/O and transmit disabled).  
• Reason  
• Reason  
Since transmission is not stopped and the transmission circuit  
is not initialized even if only the serial I/O3 enable bit is  
cleared to “0” (serial I/O disabled), the internal transmission is  
running (in this case, since pins TXD3, RXD3, SCLK3, and  
SRDY3 function as I/O ports, the transmission data is not  
output). When data is written to the transmit buffer register in  
this state, data starts to be shifted to the transmit shift register.  
When the serial I/O3 enable bit is set to “1” at this time, the  
data during internally shifting is output to the TXD3 pin and an  
operation failure occurs.  
Since transmission is not stopped and the transmission circuit  
is not initialized even if only the serial I/O3 enable bit is  
cleared to “0” (serial I/O disabled), the internal transmission is  
running (in this case, since pins TXD3, RXD3, SCLK3, and  
SRDY3 function as I/O ports, the transmission data is not  
output). When data is written to the transmit buffer register in  
this state, data starts to be shifted to the transmit shift register.  
When the serial I/O3 enable bit is set to “1” at this time, the  
data during internally shifting is output to the TXD3 pin and an  
operation failure occurs.  
1.2 Stop of receive operation  
• Note  
2.2 Stop of receive operation  
• Note  
Clear the receive enable bit to “0” (receive disabled), or clear  
the serial I/O3 enable bit to “0” (serial I/O disabled).  
Clear the receive enable bit to “0” (receive disabled).  
2.3 Stop of transmit/receive operation  
• Note 1 (only transmission operation is stopped)  
Clear the transmit enable bit to “0” (transmit disabled). The  
transmission operation does not stop by clearing the serial  
I/O3 enable bit to “0”.  
1.3 Stop of transmit/receive operation  
• Note  
Clear both the transmit enable bit and receive enable bit to “0”  
(transmit and receive disabled).  
(when data is transmitted and received in the clock  
synchronous serial I/O mode, any one of data transmission and  
reception cannot be stopped.)  
• Reason  
Since transmission is not stopped and the transmission circuit  
is not initialized even if only the serial I/O3 enable bit is  
cleared to “0” (serial I/O disabled), the internal transmission is  
running (in this case, since pins TXD3, RXD3, SCLK3, and  
SRDY3 function as I/O ports, the transmission data is not  
output). When data is written to the transmit buffer register in  
this state, data starts to be shifted to the transmit shift register.  
When the serial I/O3 enable bit is set to “1” at this time, the  
data during internally shifting is output to the TXD3 pin and an  
operation failure occurs.  
• Reason  
In the clock synchronous serial I/O mode, the same clock is  
used for transmission and reception. If any one of transmission  
and reception is disabled, a bit error occurs because  
transmission and reception cannot be synchronized.  
In this mode, the clock circuit of the transmission circuit also  
operates for data reception. Accordingly, the transmission  
circuit does not stop by clearing only the transmit enable bit to  
“0” (transmit disabled). Also, the transmission circuit is not  
initialized by clearing the serial I/O3 enable bit to “0” (serial  
I/O disabled) (refer to 1.1).  
• Note 2 (only receive operation is stopped)  
Clear the receive enable bit to “0” (receive disabled).  
Rev.1.00 Apr 2, 2007  
REJ03B0212-0100  
Page 55 of 117  
3803 Group (Spec.L)  
7. Transmit interrupt request when transmit enable bit is set  
• Note  
3. SRDY3 output of reception side  
• Note  
When using the transmit interrupt, take the following  
sequence.  
1. Set the serial I/O3 transmit interrupt enable bit to “0” (dis-  
abled).  
2. Set the transmit enable bit to “1”.  
3. Set the serial I/O3 transmit interrupt request bit to “0” after  
1 or more instruction has executed.  
4. Set the serial I/O3 transmit interrupt enable bit to “1”  
(enabled).  
When signals are output from the SRDY3 pin on the reception  
side by using an external clock in the clock synchronous serial  
I/O mode, set all of the receive enable bit, the SRDY3 output  
enable bit, and the transmit enable bit to “1” (transmit  
enabled).  
4. Setting serial I/O3 control register again  
• Note  
Set the serial I/O3 control register again after the transmission  
and the reception circuits are reset by clearing both the  
transmit enable bit and the receive enable bit to “0”.  
• Reason  
When the transmit enable bit is set to “1”, the transmit buffer  
empty flag and the transmit shift register shift completion flag  
are also set to “1”. Therefore, regardless of selecting which  
timing for the generating of transmit interrupts, the interrupt  
request is generated and the transmit interrupt request bit is set  
at this point.  
Clear both the transmit enable  
bit (TE) and the receive enable  
bit (RE) to “0”  
Set the bits 0 to 3 and bit 6 of  
the serial I/O3 control register  
Can be set with the  
LDM instruction at  
Set both the transmit enable bit  
(TE) and the receive enable bit  
(RE), or one of them to “1”  
the same time  
5.Data transmission control with referring to transmit shift  
register completion flag  
• Note  
After the transmit data is written to the transmit buffer register,  
the transmit shift register completion flag changes from “1” to  
“0” with a delay of 0.5 to 1.5 shift clocks. When data  
transmission is controlled with referring to the flag after  
writing the data to the transmit buffer register, note the delay.  
6. Transmission control when external clock is selected  
• Note  
When an external clock is used as the synchronous clock for  
data transmission, set the transmit enable bit to “1” at “H” of  
the SCLK3 input level. Also, write data to the transmit buffer  
register at “H” of the SCLK input level.  
Rev.1.00 Apr 2, 2007  
REJ03B0212-0100  
Page 56 of 117  
3803 Group (Spec.L)  
PULSE WIDTH MODULATION (PWM)  
• PWM Operation  
When bit 0 (PWM enable bit) of the PWM control register is set  
to “1”, operation starts by initializing the PWM output circuit,  
and pulses are output starting at an “H”.  
If the PWM register or PWM prescaler is updated during PWM  
output, the pulses will change in the cycle after the one in which  
the change was made.  
The 3803 group (Spec.H QzROM version) has PWM functions  
with an 8-bit resolution, based on a signal that is the clock input  
XIN or that clock input divided by 2 or the clock input XCIN or  
that clock input divided by 2 in low-speed mode.  
• Data Setting  
The PWM output pin also functions as port P56. Set the PWM  
period by the PWM prescaler, and set the “H” term of output  
pulse by the PWM register.  
If the value in the PWM prescaler is n and the value in the PWM  
register is m (where n = 0 to 255 and m = 0 to 255):  
PWM period = 255 × (n+1) / f(XIN)  
31.875 × m × (n+1)  
µs  
255  
= 31.875 × (n+1) µs  
PWM output  
(when f(XIN) = 8 MHz, count source selection bit = “0”)  
Output pulse “H” term = PWM period × m / 255  
= 0.125 × (n+1) × m µs  
T = [31.875 × (n+1)] µs  
(when f(XIN) = 8 MHz, count source selection bit = “0”)  
m : Contents of PWM register  
n : Contents of PWM prescaler  
T : PWM period  
(when f(XIN) = 8 MHz, count source selection bit = “0”)  
Fig 49. Timing of PWM period  
Data bus  
PWM  
prescaler pre-latch  
PWM  
register pre-latch  
Transfer control circuit  
PWM  
prescaler latch  
PWM  
register latch  
Count source  
selection bit  
Port P56  
“0”  
PWM prescaler  
PWM register  
XIN  
(XCIN at low-  
speed mode)  
“1”  
1/2  
Port P56 latch  
PWM function enable bit  
Fig 50. Block diagram of PWM function  
Rev.1.00 Apr 2, 2007  
REJ03B0212-0100  
Page 57 of 117  
3803 Group (Spec.L)  
b7  
b0  
PWM control register  
(PWMCON: address 002B16)  
PWM function enable bit  
0 : PWM disabled  
1 : PWM enabled  
Count source selection bit  
0 : f(XIN) (f(XCIN) at low-speed mode)  
1 : f(XIN)/2 (f(XCIN)/2 at low-speed mode)  
Not used  
(return “0” when read)  
Fig 51. Structure of PWM control register  
B
T
C
T2  
=
A
B
C
PWM output  
T
T
T2  
PWM register  
write signal  
(Changes “H” term from “A” to “ B”.)  
PWM prescaler  
write signal  
(Changes PWM period from “T” to “T2”.)  
When the contents of the PWM register or PWM prescaler have changed,  
the PWM output will change from the next period after the change.  
Fig 52. PWM output timing when PWM register or PWM prescaler is changed  
<Notes>  
The PWM starts after the PWM function enable bit is set to enable and “L” level is output from the PWM pin.  
The length of this “L” level output is as follows:  
n + 1  
(Count source selection bit = 0, where n is the value set in the prescaler)  
(Count source selection bit = 1, where n is the value set in the prescaler)  
----------------------- sec  
2×f(XIN)  
n + 1  
--------------- sec  
f(XIN)  
Rev.1.00 Apr 2, 2007  
REJ03B0212-0100  
Page 58 of 117  
3803 Group (Spec.L)  
A/D CONVERTER (successive approximation type)  
• Channel Selector  
The channel selector selects one of ports P67/AN7 to P60/AN0 or  
P07/AN15 to P00/AN8, and inputs the voltage to the comparator.  
[AD Conversion Register 1, 2 (AD1, AD2)] 003516,  
003816  
The AD conversion register is a read-only register that stores the  
result of an A/D conversion. When reading this register during an  
A/D conversion, the previous conversion result is read.  
• Comparator and Control Circuit  
The comparator and control circuit compares an analog input  
voltage with the comparison voltage, and then stores the result in  
the AD conversion registers 1, 2. When an A/D conversion is  
completed, the control circuit sets the AD conversion completion  
bit and the AD interrupt request bit to “1”.  
Note that because the comparator consists of a capacitor  
coupling, set f(XIN) to 500 kHz or more during an A/D  
conversion.  
Bit 7 of the AD conversion register 2 is the conversion mode  
selection bit. When this bit is set to “0”, the A/D converter  
becomes the 10-bit A/D mode. When this bit is set to “1”, that  
becomes the 8-bit A/D mode. The conversion result of the 8-bit  
A/D mode is stored in the AD conversion register 1. As for 10-bit  
A/D mode, not only 10-bit reading but also only high-order 8-bit  
reading of conversion result can be performed by selecting the  
reading procedure of the AD conversion registers 1, 2 after A/D  
conversion is completed (in Figure 54).  
As for 10-bit A/D mode, the 8-bit reading inclined to MSB is  
performed when reading the AD converter register 1 after A/D  
conversion is started; and when the AD converter register 1 is  
read after reading the AD converter register 2, the 8-bit reading  
inclined to LSB is performed.  
b7  
b0  
AD/DA control register  
(ADCON : address 003416)  
Analog input pin selection bits 1  
b2 b1 b0  
0 0 0: P60/AN0 or P00/AN8  
0 0 1: P61/AN1 or P01/AN9  
0 1 0: P62/AN2 or P02/AN10  
0 1 1: P63/AN3 or P03/AN11  
1 0 0: P64/AN4 or P04/AN12  
1 0 1: P65/AN5 or P05/AN13  
1 1 0: P66/AN6 or P06/AN14  
1 1 1: P67/AN7 or P07/AN15  
[AD/DA Control Register (ADCON)] 003416  
The AD/DA control register controls the A/D conversion  
process. Bits 0 to 2 and bit 4 select a specific analog input pin.  
Bit 3 signals the completion of an A/D conversion. The value of  
this bit remains at “0” during an A/D conversion, and changes to  
“1” when an A/D conversion ends. Writing “0” to this bit starts  
the A/D conversion.  
AD conversion completion bit  
0: Conversion in progress  
1: Conversion completed  
• Comparison Voltage Generator  
The comparison voltage generator divides the voltage between  
AVSS and VREF into 1024, and that outputs the comparison  
voltage in the 10-bit A/D mode (256 division in 8-bit A/D mode).  
The A/D converter successively compares the comparison  
voltage Vref in each mode, dividing the VREF voltage (see  
below), with the input voltage.  
Analog input pin selection bit 2  
0: AN0 to AN7 side  
1: AN8 to AN15 side  
Not used (returns “0” when read)  
DA1 output enable bit  
0: DA1 output disabled  
1: DA1 output enabled  
• 10-bit A/D mode (10-bit reading)  
DA2 output enable bit  
0: DA2 output disabled  
1: DA2 output enabled  
VREF  
-------------  
Vref =  
× n (n = 0 1023)  
1024  
• 10-bit A/D mode (8-bit reading)  
Fig 53. Structure of AD/DA control register  
VREF  
256  
-------------  
Vref =  
× n (n = 0 255)  
• 8-bit A/D mode  
10-bit reading  
(Read address 003816 before 003516)  
VREF  
256  
-------------  
Vref =  
× (n 0.5) (n = 1 255)  
b7  
b0  
=0  
(n = 0)  
AD conversion register 2  
(AD2: address 003816)  
0
b9 b8  
b7  
b0  
AD conversion register 1  
(AD1: address 003516)  
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0  
Note : Bits 2 to 6 of address 003816 become “0” at reading.  
8-bit reading  
(Read only address 003516)  
b7  
b0  
AD conversion register 1  
(AD1: address 003516)  
b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2  
Fig 54. Structure of 10-bit A/D mode reading  
Rev.1.00 Apr 2, 2007  
REJ03B0212-0100  
Page 59 of 117  
3803 Group (Spec.L)  
Data bus  
b7  
4
b0  
AD/DA control register  
(Address 003416)  
P60/AN0  
A/D converter interrupt request  
A/D control circuit  
P61/AN1  
P62/AN2  
P63/AN3  
P64/AN4  
P65/AN5  
P66/AN6  
P67/AN7  
P00/AN8  
P01/AN9  
P02/AN10  
P03/AN11  
P04/AN12  
P05/AN13  
P06/AN14  
P07/AN15  
AD conversion register 2  
AD conversion register 1  
(Address 003816)  
(Address 003516)  
Comparator  
10  
Resistor ladder  
VREF AVSS  
Fig 55. Block diagram of A/D converter  
Rev.1.00 Apr 2, 2007  
REJ03B0212-0100  
Page 60 of 117  
3803 Group (Spec.L)  
D/A CONVERTER  
The 3803 group (Spec.L) has two internal D/A converters (DA1  
and DA2) with 8-bit resolution.  
The D/A conversion is performed by setting the value in each  
DA conversion register. The result of D/A conversion is output  
from the DA1 or DA2 pin by setting the DA output enable bit to  
“1”.  
When using the D/A converter, the corresponding port direction  
register bit (P30/DA1 or P31/DA2) must be set to “0” (input  
status).  
The output analog voltage V is determined by the value n  
(decimal notation) in the DA conversion register as follows:  
DA1 conversion register (8)  
DA1 output enable bit  
R-2R resistor ladder  
P30/DA1  
V = VREF × n/256 (n = 0 to 255)  
Where VREF is the reference voltage.  
At reset, the DA conversion registers are cleared to “0016”, and  
the DA output enable bits are cleared to “0”, and the P30/DA1  
and P31/DA2 pins become high impedance.  
DA2 conversion register (8)  
The DA output does not have buffers. Accordingly, connect an  
external buffer when driving a low-impedance load.  
DA2 output enable bit  
P31/DA2  
R-2R resistor ladder  
Fig 56. Block diagram of D/A converter  
DA1 output enable bit  
“0”  
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
2R  
P30/DA1  
“1”  
2R  
2R  
2R  
2R  
2R  
2R  
2R  
2R  
MSB  
“0”  
LSB  
DA1 conversion register  
“1”  
AVSS  
VREF  
Fig 57. Equivalent connection circuit of D/A converter (DA1)  
Rev.1.00 Apr 2, 2007  
REJ03B0212-0100  
Page 61 of 117  
3803 Group (Spec.L)  
WATCHDOG TIMER  
underflow. If writing to the watchdog timer control register is not  
performed once, the watchdog timer does not function.  
The watchdog timer gives a mean of returning to the reset status  
when a program cannot run on a normal loop (for example,  
because of a software run-away). The watchdog timer consists of  
an 8-bit watchdog timer L and an 8-bit watchdog timer H.  
• Bit 6 of Watchdog Timer Control Register  
• When bit 6 of the watchdog timer control register is “0”, the  
MCU enters the stop mode by execution of STP instruction.  
Just after releasing the stop mode, the watchdog timer restarts  
counting(Note.). When executing the WIT instruction, the  
watchdog timer does not stop.  
• When bit 6 is “1”, execution of STP instruction causes an  
internal reset. When this bit is set to “1” once, it cannot be  
rewritten to “0” by program. Bit 6 is “0” at reset.  
• Watchdog Timer Initial Value  
Watchdog timer L is set to “FF16” and watchdog timer H is set to  
“FF16” by writing to the watchdog timer control register (address  
001E16) or at a reset. Any write instruction that causes a write  
signal can be used, such as the STA, LDM, CLB, etc. Data can  
only be written to bits 6 and 7 of the watchdog timer control  
register. Regardless of the value written to bits 0 to 5, the above-  
mentioned value will be set to each timer.  
The following shows the period between the write execution to  
the watchdog timer control register and the underflow of  
watchdog timer H.  
Bit 6 can be written only once after releasing reset. After  
rewriting it is disable to write any data to this bit.  
Bit 7 of the watchdog timer control register is “0”:  
when XCIN = 32.768 kHz; 32 s  
• Watchdog Timer Operations  
The watchdog timer stops at reset and starts to count down by  
writing to the watchdog timer control register (address 001E16).  
An internal reset occurs at an underflow of the watchdog timer  
H. The reset is released after waiting for a reset release time and  
the program is processed from the reset vector address.  
Accordingly, programming is usually performed so that writing  
to the watchdog timer control register may be started before an  
when XIN = 16 MHz; 65.536 ms  
Bit 7 of the watchdog timer control register is “1”:  
when XCIN = 32.768 kHz; 125 ms  
when XIN = 16 MHz; 256 µs  
Note. The watchdog timer continues to count even while waiting for a  
“FF16” is set when  
watchdog timer  
Data bus  
control register is  
written to.  
XCIN  
“FF16” is set when  
watchdog timer  
control register is  
written to.  
“0”  
“10”  
Watchdog timer L (8)  
Main clock division  
Watchdog timer H (8)  
“1”  
ratio selection bits(1)  
1/16  
“00”  
“01”  
Watchdog timer H count  
source selection bit  
XIN  
STP instruction function selection bit  
STP instruction  
Reset  
Internal reset  
circuit  
RESET  
Note 1: Any one of high-speed, middle-speed or low-speed mode is selected by bits 7 and 6 of the CPU mode register.  
Fig 58. Block diagram of Watchdog timer  
b7  
b0  
Watchdog timer control register  
(WDTCON : address 001E16)  
Watchdog timer H (for read-out of high-order 6 bit)  
STP instruction function selection bit  
0: Entering stop mode by execution of STP instruction  
1: Internal reset by execution of STP instruction  
Watchdog timer H count source selection bit  
0: Watchdog timer L underflow  
1: f(XIN)/16 or f(XCIN)/16  
Fig 59. Structure of Watchdog timer control register  
Rev.1.00 Apr 2, 2007  
REJ03B0212-0100  
Page 62 of 117  
3803 Group (Spec.L)  
RESET CIRCUIT  
To reset the microcomputer, RESET pin should be held at an “L”  
level for 16 cycles or more of XIN. Then the RESET pin is  
returned to an “H” level (the power source voltage should be  
between 1.8 V and 5.5 V (between 2.7 V to 5.5 V for flash  
memory version), and the oscillation should be stable), reset is  
released. After the reset is completed, the program starts from the  
address contained in address FFFD16 (high-order byte) and  
address FFFC16 (low-order byte). Make sure that the reset input  
voltage for the mask ROM version is less than 0.29 V for VCC of  
1.8 V.  
(1)  
VCC  
0 V  
RESET  
VCC  
RESET  
0 V  
0.2VCC or less  
(2)  
In the flash memory version, input to the RESET pin in the  
5 V  
following procedure.  
• When power source is stabilized  
(1) Input “L” level to RESET pin.  
VCC  
2.7 V  
Power source  
voltage detection  
circuit  
RESET  
VCC  
0 V  
5 V  
(2) Input “L” level for 16 cycles or more to XIN pin.  
(3) Input “H” level to RESET pin.  
RESET  
0 V  
• At power-on  
(1) Input “L” level to RESET pin.  
td(P-R)+XIN16 cycles or more  
(2) Increase the power source voltage to 2.7 V.  
(3) Wait for td(P-R) until internal power source has stabilized.  
(4) Input “L” level for 16 cycles or more to XIN pin.  
(5) Input “H” level to RESET pin.  
Example at VCC = 5 V  
Notes 1: Reset release voltage  
mask ROM version: VCC = 1.8 V  
Flash memory version: VCC = 2.7 V  
2: In the flash memory version, this time is required td(P-R)+XIN 16 cycles  
or more.  
Fig 60. Reset circuit example  
XIN  
φ
RESET  
Internal  
reset  
Address  
?
?
?
?
FFFC  
FFFD  
ADH,L  
Reset address from the  
vector table.  
Data  
?
?
?
?
ADL  
ADH  
SYNC  
XIN : 10.5 to 18.5 clock cycles  
Notes 1: The frequency relation of f(XIN) and f(φ) is f(XIN) = 8 • f(φ).  
2: The question marks (?) indicate an undefined state that depends on the previous state.  
Fig 61. Reset sequence  
Rev.1.00 Apr 2, 2007  
REJ03B0212-0100  
Page 63 of 117  
3803 Group (Spec.L)  
Address  
000016  
000116  
000216  
000316  
000416  
000516  
000616  
000716  
000816  
000916  
000A16  
000B16  
000C16  
000D16  
000E16  
000F16  
001016  
001816  
001916  
001A16  
001B16  
001C16  
001D16  
001E16  
001F16  
002016  
002116  
002216  
002316  
002416  
002516  
002616  
002716  
Address  
Register contents  
0016  
Register contents  
FF16  
(1)  
Port P0 (P0)  
(34)  
(35)  
(36)  
(37)  
(38)  
(39)  
(40)  
(41)  
(42)  
(43)  
(44)  
(45)  
(46)  
(47)  
(48)  
(49)  
(50)  
(51)  
(52)  
(53)  
(54)  
(55)  
(56)  
(57)  
(58)  
(59)  
(60)  
(61)  
(62)  
(63)  
(64)  
(65)  
(66)  
(67)  
(68)  
002816  
002916  
002A16  
002B16  
002C16  
002D16  
002F16  
003016  
003116  
003216  
003316  
003416  
003516  
003616  
003716  
003816  
003916  
003A16  
003B16  
003C16  
003D16  
003E16  
003F16  
0FE016  
0FE016  
0FE216  
0FF016  
0FF116  
0FF216  
0FF316  
0FF416  
0FF516  
0FF616  
(PS)  
Timer Z (low-order) (TZL)  
0016  
0016  
0016  
0016  
FF16  
(2)  
Port P0 direction register (P0D)  
Port P1 (P1)  
Timer Z (high-order) (TZH)  
0016  
(3)  
Timer Z mode register (TZM)  
0016  
(4)  
Port P1 direction register (P1D)  
Port P2 (P2)  
PWM control register (PWMCON)  
PWM prescaler (PREPWM)  
X X X X X X X X  
X X X X X X X X  
X X X X X X X X  
X X X X X X X X  
(5)  
0016  
0016  
0016  
0016  
0016  
0016  
0016  
0016  
0016  
(6)  
Port P2 direction register (P2D)  
Port P3 (P3)  
PWM register (PWM)  
(7)  
Baud rate generator 3 (BRG3)  
(8)  
Port P3 direction register (P3D)  
Port P4 (P4)  
Transmit/Receive buffer register 3 (TB3/RB3)  
Serial I/O3 status register (SIO3STS)  
Serial I/O3 control register (SIO3CON)  
UART3 control register (UART3CON)  
AD/DA control register (ADCON)  
AD conversion register 1 (AD1)  
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
(9)  
0016  
(10)  
(11)  
(12)  
(13)  
(14)  
(15)  
(16)  
(17)  
(18)  
(19)  
(20)  
(21)  
(22)  
(23)  
(24)  
(25)  
(26)  
(27)  
(28)  
(29)  
(30)  
(31)  
(32)  
(33)  
Port P4 direction register (P4D)  
Port P5 (P5)  
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
Port P5 direction register (P5D)  
Port P6 (P6)  
X X X X X X X X  
0016  
0016  
Port P6 direction register (P6D)  
Timer 12, X count source selection register (T12XCSS)  
Timer Y, Z count source selection register (TYZCSS)  
MISRG  
DA1 conversion register (DA1)  
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
DA2 conversion register (DA2)  
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
X X  
AD conversion register 2 (AD2)  
0016  
0016  
0016  
X X X X X X  
Interrupt source selection register (INTSEL)  
Interrupt edge selection register (INTEDGE)  
CPU mode register (CPUM)  
X
1
X
0
Transmit/Receive buffer register 1 (TB1/RB1)  
Serial I/O1 status register (SIO1STS)  
Serial I/O1 control register (SIO1CON)  
UART1 control register (UART1CON)  
Baud rate generator 1 (BRG1)  
Serial I/O2 control register (SIO2CON)  
Watchdog timer control register (WDTCON)  
Serial I/O2 register (SIO2)  
Prescaler 12 (PRE12)  
0
1
0 0  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0016  
0016  
0016  
Interrupt request register 1 (IREQ1)  
Interrupt request register 2 (IREQ2)  
Interrupt control register 1 (ICON1)  
Interrupt control register 2 (ICON2)  
Flash memory control register 0 (FMCR0)  
Flash memory control register 1 (FMCR1)  
Flash memory control register 2 (FMCR2)  
Port P0 pull-up control register (PULL0)  
Port P1 pull-up control register (PULL1)  
Port P2 pull-up control register (PULL2)  
Port P3 pull-up control register (PULL3)  
Port P4 pull-up control register (PULL4)  
Port P5 pull-up control register (PULL5)  
Port P6 pull-up control register (PULL6)  
Processor status register  
1
1
1
0 0  
0
0
0
0016  
0016  
X X X X X X X X  
0016  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0 1  
0
0 1 1 1 1 1 1  
X X X X X X X X  
FF16  
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
Timer 1 (T1)  
0116  
FF16  
0016  
FF16  
0016  
0016  
0016  
Timer 2 (T2)  
Timer XY mode register (TM)  
Prescaler X (PREX)  
0016  
0016  
FF16  
FF16  
FF16  
Timer X (TX)  
Prescaler Y (PREY)  
0016  
0016  
Timer Y (TY)  
X X X X X  
1
X
X
Note : X: Not fixed.  
(PCH)  
Program counter  
FFFD16 contents  
FFFC16 contents  
Since the initial values for other than above mentioned registers and  
RAM contents are indefinite at reset, they must be set.  
(PCL)  
Fig 62. Internal status at reset  
Rev.1.00 Apr 2, 2007  
REJ03B0212-0100  
Page 64 of 117  
3803 Group (Spec.L)  
CLOCK GENERATING CIRCUIT  
Oscillation Control  
(1) Stop mode  
The 3803 group (Spec.L) has two built-in oscillation circuits:  
main clock XIN-XOUT oscillation circuit and sub clock XCIN-  
XCOUT oscillation circuit. An oscillation circuit can be formed by  
connecting a resonator between XIN and XOUT (XCIN and  
XCOUT). Use the circuit constants in accordance with the  
resonator manufacturer’s recommended values. No external  
resistor is needed between XIN and XOUT since a feed-back  
resistor exists on-chip.(An external feed-back resistor may be  
needed depending on conditions.) However, an external feed-  
back resistor is needed between XCIN and XCOUT.  
If the STP instruction is executed, the internal clock φ stops at an  
“H” level, and XIN and XCIN oscillators stop. When the  
oscillation stabilizing time set after STP instruction released bit  
(bit 0 of address 001016) is “0”, the prescaler 12 is set to “FF16”  
and timer 1 is set to “0116”. When the oscillation stabilizing time  
set after STP instruction released bit is “1”, set the sufficient time  
for oscillation of used oscillator to stabilize since nothing is set to  
the prescaler 12 and timer 1.  
After STP instruction is released, the input of the prescaler 12 is  
connected to count source which had set at executing the STP  
instruction, and the output of the prescaler 12 is connected to  
timer 1. Oscillator restarts when an external interrupt is received,  
but the internal clock φ is not supplied to the CPU (remains at  
“H”) until timer 1 underflows. The internal clock φ is supplied  
for the first time, when timer 1 underflows. This ensures time for  
the clock oscillation using the ceramic resonators to be  
stabilized. When the oscillator is restarted by reset, apply “L”  
level to the RESET pin until the oscillation is stable since a wait  
time will not be generated.  
Immediately after power on, only the XIN oscillation circuit  
starts oscillating, and XCIN and XCOUT pins function as I/O ports.  
• Frequency Control  
(1) Middle-speed mode  
The internal clock φ is the frequency of XIN divided by 8. After  
reset is released, this mode is selected.  
(2) High-speed mode  
The internal clock φ is half the frequency of XIN.  
(3) Low-speed mode  
(2) Wait mode  
The internal clock φ is half the frequency of XCIN.  
(4) Low power dissipation mode  
If the WIT instruction is executed, the internal clock φ stops at an  
“H” level, but the oscillator does not stop. The internal clock φ  
restarts at reset or when an interrupt is received. Since the  
oscillator does not stop, normal operation can be started  
immediately after the clock is restarted.  
The low power consumption operation can be realized by  
stopping the main clock XIN in low-speed mode. To stop the  
main clock, set bit 5 of the CPU mode register to “1”. When the  
main clock XIN is restarted (by setting the main clock stop bit to  
“0”), set sufficient time for oscillation to stabilize.  
The sub-clock XCIN-XCOUT oscillating circuit can not directly  
input clocks that are generated externally. Accordingly, make  
sure to cause an external resonator to oscillate.  
To ensure that the interrupts will be received to release the STP  
or WIT state, their interrupt enable bits must be set to “1” before  
executing of the STP or WIT instruction.  
When releasing the STP state, the prescaler 12 and timer 1 will  
start counting the clock XIN divided by 16. Accordingly, set the  
timer 1 interrupt enable bit to “0” before executing the STP  
instruction.  
<Notes>  
• If you switch the mode between middle/high-speed and low-  
speed, stabilize both XIN and XCIN oscillations. The sufficient  
time is required for the sub clock to stabilize, especially  
immediately after power on and at returning from stop mode.  
When switching the mode between middle/high-speed and  
low-speed, set the frequency on condition that f(XIN) >  
3×f(XCIN).  
• When using the quartz-crystal oscillator of high frequency,  
such as 16 MHz etc., it may be necessary to select a specific  
oscillator with the specification demanded.  
• When using the oscillation stabilizing time set after STP  
instruction released bit set to “1”, evaluate time to stabilize  
oscillation of the used oscillator and set the value to the timer 1  
and prescaler 12.  
Rev.1.00 Apr 2, 2007  
REJ03B0212-0100  
Page 65 of 117  
3803 Group (Spec.L)  
XCIN XCOUT  
XIN  
XOUT  
Rd  
Rf  
Rd  
COUT  
CCOUT  
CIN  
CCIN  
Note 1 : Insert a damping resistor if required.  
The resistance will vary depending on the  
oscillator and the oscillation drive capacity  
setting.  
Use the value recommended by the maker of the  
oscillator.  
Also, if the oscillator manufacturer’s data sheet  
specifies that a feedback resistor be added  
external to the chip though a feedback resistor  
exists on-chip, insert a feedback resistor between  
XIN and XOUT following the instruction.  
Fig 63. Ceramic resonator circuit  
XCIN  
XCOUT  
XIN  
XOUT  
Open  
Rf  
Rd  
External oscillation  
circuit  
CCIN  
VCC  
VSS  
VCC  
VSS  
Fig 64. External clock input circuit  
Rev.1.00 Apr 2, 2007  
REJ03B0212-0100  
Page 66 of 117  
3803 Group (Spec.L)  
XCOUT  
XCIN  
“0”  
“1”  
Port XC  
switch bit  
XIN  
XOUT  
Main clock division ratio  
selection bits(1)  
(4)  
Divider  
Low-speed  
mode  
Timer 1  
Prescaler 12  
1/4  
1/2  
Reset or  
High-speed or  
middle-speed mode  
STP instruction(2)  
(3)  
Main clock division ratio  
selection bits(1)  
Middle-speed mode  
Timing φ (internal clock)  
High-speed or  
low-speed mode  
Main clock stop bit  
Reset  
Q
S
R
S
R
Q
Q
S
R
STP  
instruction  
WIT  
instruction  
STP  
instruction  
Reset  
Interrupt disable flag l  
Interrupt request  
Notes1: Either high-speed, middle-speed or low-speed mode is selected by bits 7 and 6 of the CPU mode register.  
When low-speed mode is selected, set port XC switch bit (b4) to “1”.  
2: f(XIN)/16 is supplied as the count source to the prescaler 12 at reset, the count source before executing the STP instruction is  
supplied as the count source at executing STP instruction.  
3: When bit 0 of MISRG is “0”, timer 1 is set “0116” and prescaler 12 is set “FF16” automatically. When bit 0 of MISRG is “1” , set the  
appropriate value to them in accordance with oscillation stabilizing time required by the using oscillator because nothing is  
automatically set into timer 1 and prescaler 12.  
4: Although a feed-back resistor exists on-chip, an external feed-back resistor may be needed depending on conditions.  
Fig 65. System clock generating circuit block diagram (Single-chip mode)  
Rev.1.00 Apr 2, 2007  
REJ03B0212-0100  
Page 67 of 117  
3803 Group (Spec.L)  
Reset  
Middle-speed mode  
(f(φ) = 1 MHz)  
CM7=0  
High-speed mode  
(f(φ) = 4 MHz)  
CM7=0  
CM6  
“1”←→”0”  
CM6=1  
CM5=0 (8 MHz oscillating)  
CM4=0 (32 kHz stopped)  
CM6=0  
CM5=0 (8 MHz oscillating)  
CM4=0 (32 kHz stopped)  
Middle-speed mode  
(f(φ) = 1 MHz)  
High-speed mode  
(f(φ) = 4 MHz)  
CM6  
“1”←→”0”  
CM7=0  
CM7=0  
CM6=1  
CM5=0 (8 MHz oscillating)  
CM4=1 (32 kHz oscillating)  
CM6=0  
CM5=0 (8 MHz oscillating)  
CM4=1 (32 kHz oscillating)  
Low-speed mode  
(f(φ) = 16 kHz)  
CM7=1  
CM6=0  
CM5=0 (8 MHz oscillating)  
CM4=1 (32 kHz oscillating)  
b7  
b4  
CPU mode register  
(CPUM : address 003B16)  
CM4 : Port XC switch bit  
0 : I/O port function (stop oscillating)  
1 : XCIN-XCOUT oscillating function  
CM5 : Main clock (XIN-XOUT) stop bit  
0 : Operating  
1 : Stopped  
CM7, CM6: Main clock division ratio selection bit  
b7 b6  
0 0 : φ = f(XIN)/2 (High-speed mode)  
0 1 : φ = f(XIN)/8 (Middle-speed mode)  
1 0 : φ = f(XCIN)/2 (Low-speed mode)  
1 1 : Not available  
Low-speed mode  
(f(φ) = 16 kHz)  
CM7=1  
CM6=0  
CM5=1 (8 MHz stopped)  
CM4=1 (32 kHz oscillating)  
Notes1: Switch the mode by the allows shown between the mode blocks. (Do not switch between the modes directly without an allow.)  
2: The all modes can be switched to the stop mode or the wait mode and return to the source mode when the stop mode or the  
wait mode is ended.  
3: Timer operates in the wait mode.  
4: When the stop mode is ended, a delay of approximately 1 ms occurs by connecting prescaler 12 and Timer 1 in middle/high-  
speed mode.  
5: When the stop mode is ended, a delay of approximately 0.25 s occurs by Timer 1 and Timer 2 in low-speed mode.  
6: Wait until oscillation stabilizes after oscillating the main clock XIN before the switching from the low-speed mode to middle/  
high-speed mode.  
7: The example assumes that 8 MHz is being applied to the XIN pin and 32 kHz to the XCIN pin. φ indicates the internal clock.  
Fig 66. State transitions of system clock  
Rev.1.00 Apr 2, 2007  
REJ03B0212-0100  
Page 68 of 117  
3803 Group (Spec.L)  
FLASH MEMORY MODE  
This flash memory version has some blocks on the flash memory  
as shown in Figure 67 and each block can be erased.  
The 3803 group (Spec.L)’s flash memory version has the flash  
memory that can be rewritten with a single power source.  
For this flash memory, three flash memory modes are available  
in which to read, program, and erase: the parallel I/O and  
standard serial I/O modes in which the flash memory can be  
manipulated using a programmer and the CPU rewrite mode in  
which the flash memory can be manipulated by the Central  
Processing Unit (CPU).  
In addition to the ordinary User ROM area to store the MCU  
operation control program, the flash memory has a Boot ROM  
area that is used to store a program to control rewriting in CPU  
rewrite and standard serial I/O modes. This Boot ROM area has  
had a standard serial I/O mode control program stored in it when  
shipped from the factory. However, the user can write a rewrite  
control program in this area that suits the user’s application  
system. This Boot ROM area can be rewritten in only parallel I/O  
mode.  
Summary  
Table 9 lists the summary of the 3803 group (Spec.L) flash  
memory version.  
Table 9 Summary of 3803 group (Spec.L)’s flash memory version  
Item  
Specifications  
Power source voltage (VCC)  
Program/Erase VPP voltage (VPP)  
Flash memory mode  
VCC = 2.7 to 5.5 V  
VCC = 2.7 to 5.5 V  
3 modes; Parallel I/O mode, Standard serial I/O mode, CPU  
rewrite mode  
Erase block division User ROM area/Data ROM area Refer to Figure 67.  
Boot ROM area (1)  
Not divided (4 Kbytes)  
Program method  
Erase method  
In units of bytes  
Block erase  
Program/Erase control method  
Number of commands  
Number of program/Erase times  
ROM code protection  
NOTE:  
Program/Erase control by software command  
5 commands  
100(Max.)  
Available in parallel I/O mode and standard serial I/O mode  
1. The Boot ROM area has had a standard serial I/O mode control program stored in it when shipped from the factory.  
This Boot ROM area can be erased and written in only parallel I/O mode.  
Table 10 Electrical characteristics of flash memory (program ROM)  
Limits  
Symbol  
Parameter  
Test conditions  
Unit  
Min.  
Typ.  
60  
Max.  
400  
9
Byte programming time  
VCC = 5.0 V, Topr = 25 °C  
µs  
s
(Block 1)  
0.5  
0.9  
1.3  
0.3  
(Block 2)  
9
s
Block erase time  
VCC = 5.0 V, Topr = 25 °C  
(Block 3)  
9
s
(Block A, B)  
9
s
NOTES:  
1. VCC = AVCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V, Topr = 0 °C to 60 °C, unless otherwise noted.  
2. Definition of programming/erase count  
The programming/erase count refers to the number of erase operations per block. For example, if block A is a 2 Kbyte block and  
2,048 1-byte writes are performed, all to different addresses, after which block A is erased, the programming/erase count is 1. Note  
that for each erase operation it is not possible to perform more than one programming (write) operation to the same address  
(overwrites prohibited).  
3. This is the number of times for which all electrical characteristics are guaranteed after a programming or erase operation. (The  
guarantee covers the range from 1 to maximum value.)  
4. On systems where reprogramming is performed a large number of times, it is possible to reduce the effective number of overwrites  
by sequentially shifting the write address, so that as much of the available area of the block is used up through successive  
programming (write) operations before an erase operation is performed. For example, if each programming operation uses 16 bytes  
of space, a maximum of 128 programming operations may be performed before it becomes necessary to erase the block in order to  
continue. In this way the effective number of overwrites can be kept low. The effective overwrite count can be further reduced by  
evenly dividing operations between block A and block B. It is recommended that data be retained on the number of times each  
block has been erased and a limit count set.  
5. If a block erase error occurs, execute the clear status register command followed by the block erase command a minimum of three  
times and until the erase error is no longer generated.  
Rev.1.00 Apr 2, 2007  
REJ03B0212-0100  
Page 69 of 117  
3803 Group (Spec.L)  
Boot Mode  
CPU Rewrite Mode  
The control program for CPU rewrite mode must be written into  
the User ROM or Boot ROM area in parallel I/O mode  
beforehand. (If the control program is written into the Boot ROM  
area, the standard serial I/O mode becomes unusable.)  
See Figure 67 for details about the Boot ROM area.  
Normal microcomputer mode is entered when the  
microcomputer is reset with pulling CNVSS pin low. In this case,  
the CPU starts operating using the control program in the User  
ROM area.  
When the microcomputer is reset and the CNVSS pin high after  
pulling the P45/TxD1 pin and CNVSS pin high, the CPU starts  
operating (start address of program is stored into addresses  
FFFC16 and FFFD16) using the control program in the Boot  
ROM area. This mode is called the “Boot mode”. Also, User  
ROM area can be rewritten using the control program in the Boot  
ROM area.  
In CPU rewrite mode, the internal flash memory can be operated  
on (read, program, or erase) under control of the Central  
Processing Unit (CPU).  
In CPU rewrite mode, only the User ROM area shown in Figure  
67 can be rewritten; the Boot ROM area cannot be rewritten.  
Make sure the program and block erase commands are issued for  
only the User ROM area and each block area.  
The control program for CPU rewrite mode can be stored in  
either User ROM or Boot ROM area. In the CPU rewrite mode,  
because the flash memory cannot be read from the CPU, the  
rewrite control program must be transferred to internal RAM  
area before it can be executed.  
Block Address  
Block addresses refer to the maximum address of each block.  
These addresses are used in the block erase command.  
000016  
User ROM area  
SFR area  
100016  
Data block B:  
2 Kbytes  
004016  
083F16  
180016  
200016  
Data block A:  
2 Kbytes  
Internal RAM area  
(2 Kbytes)  
RAM  
Block 3: 24 Kbytes  
Notes 1: The boot ROM area can be rewritten  
in a parallel I/O mode. (Access to  
except boot ROM area is disabled.)  
2: To specify a block, use the maximum  
address in the block.  
0FE016  
SFR area  
800016  
C00016  
0FFF16  
100016  
Block 2: 16 Kbytes  
3: The mask ROM version has the  
reserved ROM area. Note the  
difference of the area.  
Internal flash memory area  
(60 Kbytes)  
Block 1: 8 Kbytes  
Block 0: 8 Kbytes  
F00016  
E00016  
FFFF16  
Boot ROM area  
4 Kbytes  
FFFF16  
FFFF16  
Fig 67. Block diagram of built-in flash memory  
Rev.1.00 Apr 2, 2007  
REJ03B0212-0100  
Page 70 of 117  
3803 Group (Spec.L)  
Outline Performance  
CPU rewrite mode is usable in the single-chip or Boot mode. The  
only User ROM area can be rewritten.  
In CPU rewrite mode, the CPU erases, programs and reads the  
internal flash memory as instructed by software commands. This  
rewrite control program must be transferred to internal RAM  
area before it can be executed.  
The MCU enters CPU rewrite mode by setting “1” to the CPU  
rewrite mode select bit (bit 1 of address 0FE016). Then, software  
commands can be accepted.  
Use software commands to control program and erase  
operations. Whether a program or erase operation has terminated  
normally or in error can be verified by reading the status register.  
Figure 68 shows the flash memory control register 0.  
Bit 0 of the flash memory control register 0 is the RY/BY status  
flag used exclusively to read the operating status of the flash  
memory. During programming and erase operations, it is “0”  
(busy). Otherwise, it is “1” (ready).  
b7  
b0  
Flash memory control register 0  
(FMCR0: address : 0FE016: initial value: 0116)  
RY/BY status flag  
0 : Busy (being written or erased)  
1 : Ready  
CPU rewrite mode select bit(1)  
0 : CPU rewrite mode invalid  
1 : CPU rewrite mode valid  
8 KB user block E/W enable bit(1, 2)  
0 : E/W disabled  
1 : E/W enabled  
Flash memory reset bit(3, 4)  
0 : Normal operation  
1 : reset  
Not used (do not write “1” to this bit.)  
User ROM area select bit(5)  
Bit 1 of the flash memory control register 0 is the CPU rewrite  
mode select bit. When this bit is set to “1”, the MCU enters CPU  
rewrite mode. And then, software commands can be accepted. In  
CPU rewrite mode, the CPU becomes unable to access the  
internal flash memory directly. Therefore, use the control  
program in the internal RAM for write to bit 1. To set this bit 1 to  
“1”, it is necessary to write “0” and then write “1” in succession  
to bit 1. The bit can be set to “0” by only writing “0”.  
Bit 2 of the flash memory control register 0 is the 8 KB user  
block E/W enable bit. By setting combination of bit 4 of the flash  
memory control register 2 and this bit as shown in Table 11, E/W  
is disabled to user block in the CPU rewriting mode.  
Bit 3 of the flash memory control register 0 is the flash memory  
reset bit used to reset the control circuit of internal flash memory.  
This bit is used when flash memory access has failed. When the  
CPU rewrite mode select bit is “1”, setting “1” for this bit resets  
the control circuit. To release the reset, it is necessary to set this  
bit to “0”.  
0 : Boot ROM area is accessed  
1 : User ROM area is accessed  
Program status flag  
0: Pass  
1: Error  
Erase status flag  
0: Pass  
1: Error  
Notes 1: For this bit to be set to “1”, the user needs to write a “0” and then a  
“1” to it in succession. For this bit to be set to “0”, write “0” only to this  
bit.  
2: This bit can be written only when CPU rewrite mode select bit is “1”.  
3: Effective only when the CPU rewrite mode select bit = “1”. Fix this  
bit to “0” when the CPU rewrite mode select bit is “0”.  
4: When setting this bit to “1” (when the control circuit of flash memory  
is reset), the flash memory cannot be accessed for 10 µs.  
5: Write to this bit in program on RAM  
Fig 68. Structure of flash memory control register 0  
Bit 5 of the flash memory control register 0 is the User ROM  
area select bit and is valid only in the boot mode. Setting this bit  
to “1” in the boot mode switches an accessible area from the boot  
ROM area to the user ROM area. To use the CPU rewrite mode  
in the boot mode, set this bit to “1”. To rewrite bit 5, execute the  
useroriginal reprogramming control software transferred to the  
internal RAM in advance.  
Bit 6 of the flash memory control register 0 is the program status  
flag. This bit is set to “1” when writing to flash memory is failed.  
When program error occurs, the block cannot be used.  
Bit 7 of the flash memory control register 0 is the erase status  
flag.  
b7  
b0  
Flash memory control register 1  
(FMCR1: address : 0FE116: initial value: 4016)  
Erase Suspend enble bit(1)  
0 : Suspend invalid  
1 : Suspend valid  
Erase Suspend request bit(2)  
0 : Erase restart  
1 : Suspend request  
Not used (do not write “1” to this bit.)  
This bit is set to “1” when erasing flash memory is failed. When  
erase error occurs, the block cannot be used.  
Erase Suspend flag  
0 : Erase active  
1 : Erase inactive (Erase Suspend mode)  
Figure 69 shows the flash memory control register 1.  
Bit 0 of the flash memory control register 1 is the Erase suspend  
enable bit. By setting this bit to “1”, the erase suspend mode to  
suspend erase processing temporaly when block erase command  
is executed can be used. In order to set this bit to “1”, writing “0”  
and “1” in succession to bit 0. In order to set this bit to “0”, write  
“0” only to bit 0.  
Not used (do not write “1” to this bit.)  
Notes 1: For this bit to be set to “1”, the user needs to write a “0” and then a  
“1” to it in succession. For this bit to be set to “0”, write “0” only to this  
bit.  
2: Effective only when the suspend enable bit = “1”.  
Bit 1 of the flash memory control register 1 is the erase suspend  
request bit. By setting this bit to “1” when erase suspend enable  
bit is “1”, the erase processing is suspended.  
Fig 69. Structure of flash memory control register 1  
Bit 6 of the flash memory control register 1 is the erase suspend  
flag. This bit is cleared to “0” at the flash erasing.  
Rev.1.00 Apr 2, 2007  
REJ03B0212-0100  
Page 71 of 117  
3803 Group (Spec.L)  
b7  
b0  
Flash memory control register 2  
(FMCR2: address : 0FE216: initial value: 4516)  
Not used  
Not used (do not write “1” to this bit.)  
Not used  
All user block E/W enable bit(1, 2)  
0 : E/W disabled  
1 : E/W enabled  
Not used  
Notes 1: For this bit to be set to “1”, the user needs to write a “0” and then a  
“1” to it in succession. For this bit to be set to “0”, write “0” only to this  
bit.  
2: Effective only when the CPU rewrite mode select bit = “1”.  
Fig 70. Structure of flash memory control register 2  
Table 11 State of E/W inhibition function  
All user block E/W  
enable bit  
8 KB user block  
E/W enable bit  
8 KB × 2 block  
16 KB + 24 KB block  
Data block  
Addresses C00016 to FFFF16 Addresses 200016 to BFFF16 Addresses 100016 to 1FFF16  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
E/W disabled  
E/W disabled  
E/W disabled  
E/W enabled  
E/W disabled  
E/W disabled  
E/W enabled  
E/W enabled  
E/W enabled  
E/W enabled  
E/W enabled  
E/W enabled  
Figure 71 shows a flowchart for setting/releasing CPU rewrite mode.  
Start  
Single-chip mode or Boot mode  
Set CPU mode register(1)  
Transfer CPU rewrite mode control program to internal RAM  
Jump to control program transferred to internal RAM  
(Subsequent operations are executed by control program in  
this RAM)  
Set CPU rewrite mode select bit to “1” (by writing “0” and  
then “1” in succession)  
Set all user block E/W enable bit to “1” (by writing “0” and  
then “1” in succession)  
Set 8 KB user block E/W enable bit (At E/W disabled; writing  
“0” , at E/W enabled;  
writing “0” and then “1” in succession  
Using software command executes erase, program, or other  
operation  
Execute read array command(2)  
Set all user block E/W enable bit to “0”  
Set 8 KB user block E/W enable bit to “0”  
Write “0” to CPU rewrite mode select bit  
End  
Notes 1: Set the main clock as follows depending on the clock division ratio selection bits of CPU mode register (bits 6, 7 of address 003B16).  
2: Before exiting the CPU rewrite mode after completing erase or program operation, always be sure to execute the read array  
command.  
Fig 71. CPU rewrite mode set/release flowchart be sure to execute  
Rev.1.00 Apr 2, 2007  
REJ03B0212-0100  
Page 72 of 117  
3803 Group (Spec.L)  
<Notes on CPU Rewrite Mode>  
Take the notes described below when rewriting the flash memory  
in CPU rewrite mode.  
(1) Operation speed  
During CPU rewrite mode, set the system clock φ to 4.0 MHz or  
less using the clock division ratio selection bits (bits 6 and 7 of  
address 003B16).  
(2) Instructions inhibited against use  
The instructions which refer to the internal data of the flash  
memory cannot be used during CPU rewrite mode.  
(3) Interrupts  
The interrupts cannot be used during CPU rewrite mode because  
they refer to the internal data of the flash memory.  
(4) Watchdog timer  
If the watchdog timer has been already activated, internal reset  
due to an underflow will not occur because the watchdog timer is  
surely cleared during program or erase.  
(5) Reset  
Reset is always valid. The MCU is activated using the boot mode  
at release of reset in the condition of CNVSS = “H”, so that the  
program will begin at the address which is stored in addresses  
FFFC16 and FFFD16 of the boot ROM area.  
Rev.1.00 Apr 2, 2007  
REJ03B0212-0100  
Page 73 of 117  
3803 Group (Spec.L)  
Software Commands  
The RY/BY status flag of the flash memory control register is  
“0” during write operation and “1” when the write operation is  
completed as is the status register bit 7.  
At program end, program results can be checked by reading the  
status register.  
Table 12 lists the software commands.  
After setting the CPU rewrite mode select bit to “1”, execute a  
software command to specify an erase or program operation.  
Each software command is explained below.  
• Read Array Command (FF16)  
The read array mode is entered by writing the command code  
“FF16” in the first bus cycle. When an address to be read is input  
in one of the bus cycles that follow, the contents of the specified  
address are read out at the data bus (D0 to D7).  
The read array mode is retained until another command is  
written.  
Start  
Write “4016”  
Write address  
Write  
• Read Status Register Command (7016)  
Write data  
When the command code “7016” is written in the first bus cycle,  
the contents of the status register are read out at the data bus (D0  
to D7) by a read in the second bus cycle.  
Read status register  
The status register is explained in the next section.  
• Clear Status Register Command (5016)  
This command is used to clear the bits SR4 and SR5 of the status  
register after they have been set. These bits indicate that  
operation has ended in an error. To use this command, write the  
command code “5016” in the first bus cycle.  
SR7 = 1?  
or  
RY/BY = 1?  
NO  
NO  
YES  
• Program Command (4016)  
Program operation starts when the command code “4016” is  
written in the first bus cycle. Then, if the address and data to  
program are written in the 2nd bus cycle, program operation  
(data programming and verification) will start.  
Program error  
SR4 = “0”?  
YES  
Whether the write operation is completed can be confirmed by  
read status register or the RY/BY status flag. When the program  
starts, the read status register mode is entered automatically and  
the contents of the status register is read at the data bus (D0 to  
D7). The status register bit 7 (SR7) is set to “0” at the same time  
the write operation starts and is returned to “1” upon completion  
of the write operation. In this case, the read status register mode  
remains active until the read array command (FF16) is written.  
Program completed  
Fig 72. Program flowchart  
Table 12 List of software commands (CPU rewrite mode)  
First bus cycle  
Second bus cycle  
Address  
cycle  
number  
Command  
Data  
Mode  
Data  
Mode  
Address  
(D0 to D7)  
(D0 to D7)  
X(4)  
X
Read array  
Read status register  
Clear status register  
Program  
1
2
1
2
2
Write  
Write  
Write  
Write  
Write  
FF16  
SRD(1)  
7016  
5016  
4016  
2016  
Read  
X
X
WA(2)  
BA(3)  
WD(2)  
D016  
X
Write  
Write  
Block erase  
X
NOTES:  
1. SRD = Status Register Data  
2. WA = Write Address, WD = Write Data  
3. BA = Block Address to be erased (Input the maximum address of each block.)  
4. X denotes a given address in the User ROM area.  
Rev.1.00 Apr 2, 2007  
REJ03B0212-0100  
Page 74 of 117  
3803 Group (Spec.L)  
• Block Erase Command (2016/D016)  
By writing the command code “2016” in the first bus cycle and  
the confirmation command code “D016” and the block address in  
the second bus cycle that follows, the block erase (erase and  
erase verify) operation starts for the block address of the flash  
memory to be specified.  
Whether the block erase operation is completed can be confirmed  
by read status register or the RY/BY status flag of flash memory  
control register. At the same time the block erase operation  
starts, the read status register mode is automatically entered, so  
that the contents of the status register can be read out. The status  
register  
Start  
Write “2016”  
Write “D016”  
Blockaddress  
bit 7 (SR7) is set to “0” at the same time the block erase  
operation starts and is returned to “1” upon completion of the  
block erase operation. In this case, the read status register mode  
remains active until the read array command (FF16) is written.  
The RY/BY status flag is “0” during block erase operation and  
“1” when the block erase operation is completed as is the status  
register bit 7.  
After the block erase ends, erase results can be checked by  
reading the status register. For details, refer to the section where  
the status register is detailed.  
Read status register  
SR7 = 1?  
or  
RY/BY = 1?  
NO  
NO  
YES  
SR5 = “0”?  
YES  
Erase error  
Erase completed  
(write read command  
“FF16”)  
Fig 73. Erase flowchart  
Rev.1.00 Apr 2, 2007  
REJ03B0212-0100  
Page 75 of 117  
3803 Group (Spec.L)  
• Status Register  
• Erase status (SR5)  
The status register shows the operating status of the flash  
memory and whether erase operations and programs ended  
successfully or in error. It can be read in the following ways:  
(1) By reading an arbitrary address from the User ROM area  
after writing the read status register command (7016)  
(2) By reading an arbitrary address from the User ROM area in  
the period from when the program starts or erase operation  
starts to when the read array command (FF16) is input.  
The erase status indicates the operating status of erase operation.  
If an erase error occurs, it is set to “1”. When the erase status is  
cleared, it is reset to “0”.  
• Program status (SR4)  
The program status indicates the operating status of write  
operation.  
When a write error occurs, it is set to “1”.  
The program status is reset to “0” when it is cleared.  
Also, the status register can be cleared by writing the clear status  
register command (5016).  
After reset, the status register is set to “8016”.  
Table 13 shows the status register. Each bit in this register is  
explained below.  
If “1” is written for any of the SR5 and SR4 bits, the read array,  
program, and block erase commands are not accepted. Before  
executing these commands, execute the clear status register  
command (5016) and clear the status register.  
Also, if any commands are not correct, both SR5 and SR4 are set  
to “1”.  
• Sequencer status (SR7)  
The sequencer status indicates the operating status of the flash  
memory. This bit is set to “0” (busy) during write or erase  
operation and is set to “1” when these operations ends.  
After power-on, the sequencer status is set to “1” (ready).  
Table 13 Definition of each bit in status register  
Definition  
Each bit of  
Status name  
SRD bits  
“1”  
“0”  
SR7 (bit7)  
SR6 (bit6)  
SR5 (bit5)  
SR4 (bit4)  
SR3 (bit3)  
SR2 (bit2)  
SR1 (bit1)  
SR0 (bit0)  
Sequencer status  
Reserved  
Ready  
Busy  
Erase status  
Program status  
Reserved  
Terminated in error  
Terminated normally  
Terminated in error  
Terminated normally  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Rev.1.00 Apr 2, 2007  
REJ03B0212-0100  
Page 76 of 117  
3803 Group (Spec.L)  
Full Status Check  
By performing full status check, it is possible to know the  
execution results of erase and program operations. Figure 74  
shows a full status check flowchart and the action to be taken  
when each error occurs.  
Read status register  
Execute the clear status register command (5016)  
to clear the status register. Try performing the  
operation one more time after confirming that the  
command is entered correctly.  
YES  
SR4 = “1”  
and  
SR5 = “1”?  
Command  
sequence error  
NO  
SR5 = “0”?  
YES  
SR4 = “0”?  
YES  
End (block erase, program)  
NO  
Erase error  
Should an erase error occur, the block in error  
cannot be used.  
NO  
Should a program error occur, the block in error  
cannot be used.  
Program error  
Note: When one of SR5 and SR4 is set to “1”, none of the read array, program,  
and block erase commands is accepted. Execute the clear status register  
command (5016) before executing these commands.  
Fig 74. Full status check flowchart and remedial procedure for errors  
Rev.1.00 Apr 2, 2007  
REJ03B0212-0100  
Page 77 of 117  
3803 Group (Spec.L)  
Functions To Inhibit Rewriting Flash Memory Version  
If one or both of the pair of ROM code protect bits is set to “0”,  
the ROM code protect is turned on, so that the contents of  
internal flash memory are protected against readout and  
modification. The ROM code protect is implemented in two  
levels. If level 2 is selected, the flash memory is protected even  
against readout by a shipment inspection LSI tester, etc. When an  
attempt is made to select both level 1 and level 2, level 2 is  
selected by default.  
If both of the two ROM code protect reset bits are set to “00”, the  
ROM code protect is turned off, so that the contents of internal  
flash memory can be readout or modified. Once the ROM code  
protect is turned on, the contents of the ROM code protect reset  
bits cannot be modified in parallel I/O mode. Use the serial I/O  
or CPU rewrite mode to rewrite the contents of the ROM code  
protect reset bits.  
To prevent the contents of internal flash memory from being read  
out or rewritten easily, this MCU incorporates a ROM code  
protect function for use in parallel I/O mode and an ID code  
check function for use in standard serial I/O mode.  
• ROM Code Protect Function  
The ROM code protect function is the function to inhibit reading  
out or modifying the contents of internal flash memory by using  
the ROM code protect control address (address FFDB16) in  
parallel I/O mode. Figure 75 shows the ROM code protect  
control address (address FFDB16). (This address exists in the  
User ROM area.)  
Rewriting of only the ROM code protect control address (address  
FFDB16) cannot be performed. When rewriting the ROM code  
protect reset bit, rewrite the whole user ROM area (block 0)  
containing the ROM code protect control address.  
b7  
b0  
1
ROM code protect control address (address FFDB16)  
ROMCP (FF16 when shipped)  
1
Reserved bits (“1” at read/write)  
ROM code protect level 2 set bits (ROMCP2)(1, 2)  
b3b2  
0 0: Protect enabled  
0 1: Protect enabled  
1 0: Protect enabled  
1 1: Protect disabled  
ROM code protect reset bits (ROMCR)(3)  
b5b4  
0 0: Protect removed  
0 1: Protect set bits effective  
1 0: Protect set bits effective  
1 1: Protect set bits effective  
ROM code protect level 1 set bits (ROMCP1)(1)  
b7b6  
0 0: Protect enabled  
0 1: Protect enabled  
1 0: Protect enabled  
1 1: Protect disabled  
Notes 1: When ROM code protect is turned on, the internal flash memory is protected  
against readout or modification in parallel I/O mode.  
2: When ROM code protect level 2 is turned on, ROM code readout by a  
shipment inspection LSI tester, etc. also is inhibited.  
3: The ROM code protect reset bits can be used to turn off ROM code protect  
level 1 and ROM code protect level 2. However, since these bits cannot be  
modified in parallel I/O mode, they need to be rewritten in serial I/O mode or  
CPU rewrite mode.  
Fig 75. Structure of ROM code protect control address  
Rev.1.00 Apr 2, 2007  
REJ03B0212-0100  
Page 78 of 117  
3803 Group (Spec.L)  
• ID Code Check Function  
Use this function in standard serial I/O mode. When the contents  
of the flash memory are not blank, the ID code sent from the  
programmer is compared with the ID code written in the flash  
memory to see if they match. If the ID codes do not match, the  
commands sent from the programmer are not accepted. The ID  
code consists of 8-bit data, and its areas are FFD416 to FFDA16.  
Write a program which has had the ID code preset at these  
addresses to the flash memory.  
Address  
FFD416  
FFD516  
FFD616  
FFD716  
FFD816  
FFD916  
FFDA16  
FFDB16  
ID1  
ID2  
ID3  
ID4  
ID5  
ID6  
ID7  
ROM code protect control  
Interrupt vector area  
Fig 76. ID code store addresses  
Rev.1.00 Apr 2, 2007  
REJ03B0212-0100  
Page 79 of 117  
3803 Group (Spec.L)  
Parallel I/O Mode  
The parallel I/O mode is used to input/output software  
commands, address and data in parallel for operation (read,  
program and erase) to internal flash memory.  
Use the external device (writer) only for 3803 group (Spec.L)  
flash memory version. For details, refer to the userÅfs manual of  
each writer manufacturer.  
• User ROM and Boot ROM Areas  
In parallel I/O mode, the User ROM and Boot ROM areas shown  
in Figure 67 can be rewritten. Both areas of flash memory can be  
operated on in the same way.  
The Boot ROM area is 4 Kbytes in size and located at addresses  
F00016 through FFFF16. Make sure program and block erase  
operations are always performed within this address range.  
(Access to any location outside this address range is prohibited.)  
In the Boot ROM area, an erase block operation is applied to  
only one 4 Kbyte block. The boot ROM area has had a standard  
serial I/O mode control program stored in it when shipped from  
the fac-tory. Therefore, using the MCU in standard serial I/O  
mode, do not rewrite to the Boot ROM area.  
Rev.1.00 Apr 2, 2007  
REJ03B0212-0100  
Page 80 of 117  
3803 Group (Spec.L)  
Standard serial I/O Mode  
The standard serial I/O mode inputs and outputs the software  
commands, addresses and data needed to operate (read, program,  
erase, etc.) the internal flash memory. This I/O is clock  
synchronized serial. This mode requires a purpose-specific  
peripheral unit.  
The standard serial I/O mode is different from the parallel I/O  
mode in that the CPU controls flash memory rewrite (uses the  
CPU rewrite mode), rewrite data input and so forth. The standard  
serial I/O mode is started by connecting “H” to the CNVSS pin  
and “H” to the P45 (BOOTENT) pin, and releasing the reset  
operation. (In the ordinary microcomputer mode, set CNVSS pin  
to “L” level.) This control program is written in the Boot ROM  
area when the product is shipped from Renesas. Accordingly,  
make note of the fact that the standard serial I/O mode cannot be  
used if the Boot ROM area is rewritten in parallel I/O mode. The  
standard serial I/ O mode has standard serial I/O mode 1 of the  
clock synchronous serial and standard serial I/O mode 2 of the  
clock asynchronous serial. Table 14 and 15 show description of  
pin function (standard serial I/O mode). Figure 77 to 80 show the  
pin connections for the standard serial I/O mode.  
In standard serial I/O mode, only the User ROM area shown in  
Figure 67 can be rewritten. The Boot ROM area cannot be  
written.  
In standard serial I/O mode, a 7-byte ID code is used. When there  
is data in the flash memory, this function determines whether the  
ID code sent from the peripheral unit (programmer) and those  
written in the flash memory match. The commands sent from the  
peripheral unit (programmer) are not accepted unless the ID code  
matches.  
Rev.1.00 Apr 2, 2007  
REJ03B0212-0100  
Page 81 of 117  
3803 Group (Spec.L)  
Table 14 Description of pin function (Flash Memory Serial I/O Mode 1)  
Pin name  
Signal name  
Power supply  
I/O  
Function  
VCC,VSS  
I
I
I
Apply 2.7 to 5.5 V to the VCC pin and 0 V to the VSS pin.  
After input of port is set, input “H” level.  
CNVSS  
RESET  
CNVSS  
Reset input  
Reset input pin. To reset the microcomputer, RESET pin should be  
held at an “L” level for 16 cycles or more of XIN.  
XIN  
Clock input  
I
Connect an oscillation circuit between the XIN and XOUT pins.  
As for the connection method, refer to the “clock generating circuit”.  
XOUT  
AVSS  
VREF  
Clock output  
O
Analog power supply input  
Reference voltage input  
I/O port  
Connect AVSS to VSS.  
I
Apply reference voltage of A/D to this pin.  
Input “L” or “H” level, or keep open.  
P00P07, P10P17,  
P20P27, P30P37,  
P40P43, P50P57,  
P60P67  
I/O  
P44  
P45  
P46  
P47  
RxD input  
I
Serial data input pin.  
Serial data output pin.  
Serial clock input pin.  
BUSY signal output pin.  
TxD output  
SCLK input  
BUSY output  
O
I
O
Table 15 Description of pin function (Flash Memory Serial I/O Mode 2)  
Pin name  
Signal name  
Power supply  
I/O  
Function  
VCC,VSS  
I
I
I
Apply 2.7 to 5.5 V to the VCC pin and 0 V to the VSS pin.  
After input of port is set, input “H” level.  
CNVSS  
RESET  
CNVSS  
Reset input  
Reset input pin. To reset the microcomputer, RESET pin should be  
held at an “L” level for 16 cycles or more of XIN.  
XIN  
Clock input  
I
Connect an oscillation circuit between the XIN and XOUT pins.  
As for the connection method, refer to the “clock generating circuit”.  
XOUT  
AVSS  
VREF  
Clock output  
O
Analog power supply input  
Reference voltage input  
I/O port  
Connect AVSS to VSS.  
I
Apply reference voltage of A/D to this pin.  
Input “L” or “H” level, or keep open.  
P00P07, P10P17,  
P20P27, P30P37,  
P40P43, P50P57,  
P60P67  
I/O  
P44  
P45  
P46  
P47  
RxD input  
I
Serial data input pin.  
Serial data output pin.  
Input “L” level.  
TxD output  
SCLK input  
BUSY output  
O
I
O
BUSY signal output pin.  
Rev.1.00 Apr 2, 2007  
REJ03B0212-0100  
Page 82 of 117  
3803 Group (Spec.L)  
P37/SRDY3  
P20(LED0)  
P21(LED1)  
P22(LED2)  
P23(LED3)  
P24(LED4)  
P25(LED5)  
P26(LED6)  
P27(LED7)  
VSS  
32  
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
18  
17  
49  
50  
51  
52  
53  
54  
55  
56  
57  
58  
59  
60  
P36/SCLK3  
P35/TXD3  
P34/RXD3  
P33  
P32  
P31/DA2  
P30/DA1  
VCC  
M38039FFLHP/KP  
VSS  
VCC  
VREF  
XOUT  
*
AVSS  
XIN  
P67/AN7  
P66/AN6  
P65/AN5  
P64/AN4  
P63/AN3  
P40/INT40/XCOUT  
P41/INT00/XCIN  
RESET  
61  
62  
63  
64  
RESET  
CNVSS  
CNVSS  
P42/INT1  
*Connect oscillation circuit.  
indicates flash memory pin.  
RxD  
TxD  
SCLK  
BUSY  
Package code: PLQP0064KB-A (64P6Q-A) / PLQP0064GA-A (64P6U-A)  
Fig 77. Connection for standard serial I/O mode 1 (M38039FFLHP/KP)  
Rev.1.00 Apr 2, 2007  
REJ03B0212-0100  
Page 83 of 117  
3803 Group (Spec.L)  
P37/SRDY3  
P20(LED0)  
P21(LED1)  
P22(LED2)  
P23(LED3)  
P24(LED4)  
P25(LED5)  
P26(LED6)  
P27(LED7)  
VSS  
32  
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
18  
17  
49  
50  
51  
52  
53  
54  
55  
56  
57  
58  
59  
60  
P36/SCLK3  
P35/TXD3  
P34/RXD3  
P33  
P32  
P31/DA2  
P30/DA1  
VCC  
M38039FFLHP/KP  
VSS  
VCC  
VREF  
XOUT  
*
AVSS  
XIN  
P67/AN7  
P66/AN6  
P65/AN5  
P64/AN4  
P63/AN3  
P40/INT40/XCOUT  
P41/INT00/XCIN  
RESET  
61  
62  
63  
64  
RESET  
CNVSS  
CNVSS  
P42/INT1  
*Connect oscillation circuit.  
indicates flash memory pin.  
RxD  
TxD  
“L” input  
BUSY  
Package code: PLQP0064KB-A (64P6Q-A) / PLQP0064GA-A (64P6U-A)  
Fig 78. Connection for standard serial I/O mode 2 (M38039FFLHP/KP)  
Rev.1.00 Apr 2, 2007  
REJ03B0212-0100  
Page 84 of 117  
3803 Group (Spec.L)  
VCC  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
64  
63  
62  
61  
60  
59  
58  
57  
56  
55  
54  
53  
52  
51  
50  
49  
48  
47  
46  
45  
44  
43  
42  
41  
40  
39  
38  
37  
36  
35  
34  
33  
P30/DA1  
P31/DA2  
P32  
VCC  
VREF  
AVSS  
P67/AN7  
P66/AN6  
P65/AN5  
P64/AN4  
P63/AN3  
P62/AN2  
P61/AN1  
P60/AN0  
P57/INT3  
P56/PWM  
P55/CNTR1  
P54/CNTR0  
P53/SRDY2  
P52/SCLK2  
P51/SOUT2  
P50/SIN2  
P33  
P34/RXD3  
P35/TXD3  
P36/SCLK3  
P37/SRDY3  
P00/AN8  
P01/AN9  
P02/AN10  
P03/AN11  
P04/AN12  
P05/AN13  
P06/AN14  
P07/AN15  
P10/INT41  
P11/INT01  
P12  
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
P13  
P14  
P15  
P16  
BUSY  
P47/SRDY1/CNTR2  
P46/SCLK1  
P45/TXD1  
SCLK  
RXD  
TXD  
P44/RXD1  
P43/INT2  
P42/INT1  
CNVSS  
P17  
P20(LED0)  
P21(LED1)  
P22(LED2)  
P23(LED3)  
P24(LED4)  
P25(LED5)  
P26(LED6)  
P27(LED7)  
CNVSS  
RESET  
RESET  
P41/INT00/XCIN  
P40/INT40/XCOUT  
XIN  
*
XOUT  
VSS  
VSS  
Package code: PRDP0064BA-A (64P4B)  
*Connect oscillation circuit.  
indicates flash memory pin.  
Fig 79. Connection for standard serial I/O mode 1 (M38039FFLSP)  
Rev.1.00 Apr 2, 2007  
REJ03B0212-0100  
Page 85 of 117  
3803 Group (Spec.L)  
VCC  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
64  
63  
62  
61  
60  
59  
58  
57  
56  
55  
54  
53  
52  
51  
50  
49  
48  
47  
46  
45  
44  
43  
42  
41  
40  
39  
38  
37  
36  
35  
34  
33  
VCC  
VREF  
P30/DA1  
P31/DA2  
P32  
AVSS  
P67/AN7  
P66/AN6  
P65/AN5  
P64/AN4  
P63/AN3  
P62/AN2  
P61/AN1  
P60/AN0  
P57/INT3  
P56/PWM  
P55/CNTR1  
P54/CNTR0  
P53/SRDY2  
P52/SCLK2  
P51/SOUT2  
P50/SIN2  
P33  
P34/RXD3  
P35/TXD3  
P36/SCLK3  
P37/SRDY3  
P00/AN8  
P01/AN9  
P02/AN10  
P03/AN11  
P04/AN12  
P05/AN13  
P06/AN14  
P07/AN15  
P10/INT41  
P11/INT01  
P12  
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
BUSY  
P47/SRDY1/CNTR2  
P46/SCLK1  
P45/TXD1  
P13  
P14  
P15  
P16  
“L” input  
RXD  
TXD  
P44/RXD1  
P43/INT2  
P42/INT1  
CNVSS  
P17  
P20(LED0)  
P21(LED1)  
P22(LED2)  
P23(LED3)  
P24(LED4)  
P25(LED5)  
P26(LED6)  
P27(LED7)  
CNVSS  
RESET  
RESET  
P41/INT00/XCIN  
P40/INT40/XCOUT  
XIN  
*
XOUT  
VSS  
VSS  
Package code: PRDP0064BA-A (64P4B)  
*Connect oscillation circuit.  
indicates flash memory pin.  
Fig 80. Connection for standard serial I/O mode 2 (M38039FFLSP)  
Rev.1.00 Apr 2, 2007  
REJ03B0212-0100  
Page 86 of 117  
3803 Group (Spec.L)  
PIN CONFIGURATION (TOP VIEW)  
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
50  
P36/SCLK3  
46  
P02/AN10  
44  
P04/AN12  
41  
P07/AN15  
40  
P10/INT41  
32  
P20(LED0)  
31  
P21(LED1)  
30  
P22(LED2)  
8
8
51  
47  
45  
42  
39  
27  
29  
28  
7
6
7
6
P35/TXD3  
P01/AN9  
P03/AN11  
P06/AN14  
P11/INT01  
P25(LED5)  
P23(LED3)  
P24(LED4)  
53  
52  
48  
43  
38  
37  
26  
25  
P33  
P34/RXD3  
P00/AN8  
P05/AN13  
P12  
P13  
P26(LED6)  
P27(LED7)  
VSS  
56  
55  
54  
49  
33  
36  
35  
34  
5
4
3
2
1
5
4
3
2
1
P30/DA1  
P31/DA2  
P32  
P37/SRDY3  
P17  
P14  
P15  
P16  
*
1
64  
58  
59  
57  
24  
22  
23  
P62/AN2  
P63/AN3  
VREF  
AVSS  
VCC  
VSS  
XIN  
XOUT  
BUSY  
TXD  
VCC  
60  
P67/AN7  
61  
P66/AN6  
4
P57/INT3  
7
12  
14  
P45/TXD1  
21  
20  
P47/SRDY1/CNTR2  
P40/INT40/XCOUT  
P41/INT00/XCIN  
P54/CNTR0  
RESET  
CNVSS  
62  
P65/AN5  
63  
P64/AN4  
5
P56/PWM  
8
P53/SRDY2  
10  
P51/SOUT2  
13  
P46/SCLK1  
17  
P42/INT1  
19  
RESET  
SCLK  
RXD  
2
P61/AN1  
3
P60/AN0  
6
9
P52/SCLK2  
11  
P50/SIN2  
15  
P44/RXD1  
16  
P43/INT2  
18  
CNVSS  
P55/CNTR1  
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
Package code: PTLG0064JA-A (64F0G)  
* Connect oscillation circuit.  
indicates flash memory pin.  
Fig 81. Connection for standard serial I/O mode 1 (M38039FFLWG)  
Rev.1.00 Apr 2, 2007  
REJ03B0212-0100  
Page 87 of 117  
3803 Group (Spec.L)  
PIN CONFIGURATION (TOP VIEW)  
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
50  
P36/SCLK3  
46  
P02/AN10  
44  
P04/AN12  
41  
P07/AN15  
40  
P10/INT41  
32  
P20(LED0)  
31  
P21(LED1)  
30  
P22(LED2)  
8
8
51  
47  
45  
42  
39  
27  
29  
28  
7
6
7
6
P35/TXD3  
P01/AN9  
P03/AN11  
P06/AN14  
P11/INT01  
P25(LED5)  
P23(LED3)  
P24(LED4)  
53  
52  
48  
43  
38  
37  
26  
25  
P33  
P34/RXD3  
P00/AN8  
P05/AN13  
P12  
P13  
P26(LED6)  
P27(LED7)  
VSS  
56  
55  
54  
49  
33  
36  
35  
34  
5
4
3
2
1
5
4
3
2
1
P30/DA1  
P31/DA2  
P32  
P37/SRDY3  
P17  
P14  
P15  
P16  
*
1
64  
58  
59  
57  
24  
22  
23  
P62/AN2  
P63/AN3  
VREF  
AVSS  
VCC  
VSS  
XIN  
XOUT  
BUSY  
TXD  
VCC  
60  
P67/AN7  
61  
P66/AN6  
4
P57/INT3  
7
12  
14  
P45/TXD1  
21  
20  
P47/SRDY1/CNTR2  
P40/INT40/XCOUT  
P41/INT00/XCIN  
P54/CNTR0  
RESET  
CNVSS  
62  
P65/AN5  
63  
P64/AN4  
5
P56/PWM  
8
P53/SRDY2  
10  
P51/SOUT2  
13  
P46/SCLK1  
17  
P42/INT1  
19  
RESET  
“L”input  
RXD  
2
P61/AN1  
3
P60/AN0  
6
9
P52/SCLK2  
11  
P50/SIN2  
15  
P44/RXD1  
16  
P43/INT2  
18  
CNVSS  
P55/CNTR1  
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
Package code: PTLG0064JA-A (64F0G)  
* Connect oscillation circuit.  
indicates flash memory pin.  
Fig 82. Connection for standard serial I/O mode 2 (M38039FFLWG)  
Rev.1.00 Apr 2, 2007  
REJ03B0212-0100  
Page 88 of 117  
3803 Group (Spec.L)  
td(CNVSS-RESET)  
td(P45-RESET)  
Power source  
RESET  
CNVSS  
P45(TXD)  
P46(SCLK)  
P47(BUSY)  
P44(RXD)  
Limits  
Notes: In the standard serial I/O mode 1, input “H” to the P46 pin.  
Be sure to set the CNVSS pin to “H” before rising RESET.  
Be sure to set the P45 pin to “H” before rising RESET.  
Symbol  
Unit  
Min.  
0
Typ.  
Max.  
td(CNVSS-RESET)  
td(P45-RESET)  
ms  
ms  
0
Fig 83. Operating waveform for standard serial I/O mode 1  
td(CNVSS-RESET)  
td(P45-RESET)  
Power source  
RESET  
CNVSS  
P45(TXD)  
P46(SCLK)  
P47(BUSY)  
P44(RXD)  
Limits  
Typ.  
Notes: In the standard serial I/O mode 2, input “H” to the P46 pin.  
Be sure to set the CNVSS pin to “H” before rising RESET.  
Be sure to set the P45 pin to “H” before rising RESET.  
Symbol  
Unit  
Min.  
0
Max.  
td(CNVSS-RESET)  
td(P45-RESET)  
ms  
ms  
0
Fig 84. Operating waveform for standard serial I/O mode 2  
Rev.1.00 Apr 2, 2007  
REJ03B0212-0100  
Page 89 of 117  
3803 Group (Spec.L)  
3803 Group (Spec. L)  
T_VDD  
VCC  
T_VPP  
T_RXD  
T_TXD  
T_SCLK  
N.C.  
4.7kΩ  
P45 (TXD)  
P44 (RXD)  
P46 (SCLK)  
CNVSS  
T_PGM/OE/MD  
T_BUSY  
4.7kΩ  
P47 (BUSY)  
RESET circuit  
RESET  
T_RESET  
GND  
VSS  
AVSS  
XIN  
XOUT  
Set the same termination as the  
single-chip mode.  
Note: For the programming circuit, the wiring capacity of each signal pin must not exceed 47 pF.  
Fig 85. When using programmer (in standard serial I/O mode 1) of Suisei Electronics System Co., LTD,  
connection example  
Rev.1.00 Apr 2, 2007  
REJ03B0212-0100  
Page 90 of 117  
3803 Group (Spec.L)  
3803 Group (Spec. L)  
VCC  
VCC  
CNVSS  
4.7 kΩ  
4.7 kΩ  
4.7 kΩ  
P45 (TXD)  
P44 (RXD)  
P46 (SCLK)  
P47 (BUSY)  
*1  
RESET  
circuit  
13  
11  
14  
12  
10  
8
9
7
RESET  
6
4
2
5
3
VSS  
AVSS  
1
XIN  
XOUT  
Set the same termination as the  
single-chip mode.  
*1 : Open-collector buffer  
Note : For the programming circuit, the wiring capacity of each signal pin must not exceed 47 pF.  
Fig 86. When using E8 programmer (in standard serial I/O mode 1), connection example  
Rev.1.00 Apr 2, 2007  
REJ03B0212-0100  
Page 91 of 117  
3803 Group (Spec.L)  
NOTES  
NOTES ON PROGRAMMING  
1. Processor Status Register  
Set D flag to “1”  
ADC or SBC instruction  
NOP instruction  
(1) Initializing of processor status register  
Flags which affect program execution must be initialized after a reset.  
In particular, it is essential to initialize the T and D flags because  
they have an important effect on calculations.  
<Reason>  
After a reset, the contents of the processor status register (PS) are  
undefined except for the I flag which is “1”.  
SEC, CLC, or CLD instruction  
Reset  
Fig 89. Execution of decimal calculations  
3. JMP instruction  
Initializing of flags  
When using the JMP instruction in indirect addressing mode, do  
not specify the last address on a page as an indirect address.  
Main program  
4. Multiplication and Division Instructions  
Fig 87. Initialization of processor status register  
• The index X mode (T) and the decimal mode (D) flags do not  
affect the MUL and DIV instruction.  
• The execution of these instructions does not change the  
contents of the processor status register.  
(2) How to reference the processor status register  
To reference the contents of the processor status register (PS),  
execute the PHP instruction once then read the contents of (S+1).  
If necessary, execute the PLP instruction to return the PS to its  
original status.  
5. Ports  
The contents of the port direction registers cannot be read. The  
following cannot be used:  
• The data transfer instruction (LDA, etc.)  
• The operation instruction when the index X mode flag (T) is “1”  
• The instruction with the addressing mode which uses the value  
of a direction register as an index  
(S)  
Stored PS  
(S) + 1  
• The bit-test instruction (BBC or BBS, etc.) to a direction  
register  
• The read-modify-write instructions (ROR, CLB, or SEB, etc.)  
to a direction register.  
Fig 88. Stack memory contents after PHP instruction  
execution  
Use instructions such as LDM and STA, etc., to set the port  
direction registers.  
2. Decimal calculations  
(1) Execution of decimal calculations  
6. Instruction Execution Timing  
The ADC and SBC are the only instructions which will yield  
proper decimal notation, set the decimal mode flag (D) to “1”  
with the SED instruction. After executing the ADC or SBC  
instruction, execute another instruction before executing the  
SEC, CLC, or CLD instruction.  
The instruction execution time can be obtained by multiplying  
the frequency of the internal clock φ by the number of cycles  
mentioned in the 740 Family Software Manual.  
The frequency of the internal clock φ is the twice the XIN cycle in  
high-speed mode, 8 times the XIN cycle in middle-speed mode,  
and the twice the XCIN in low-speed mode.  
(2) Notes on status flag in decimal mode  
When decimal mode is selected, the values of three of the flags in  
the status register (the N, V, and Z flags) are invalid after a ADC  
or SBC instruction is executed.  
The carry flag (C) is set to “1” if a carry is generated as a result of the  
calculation, or is cleared to “0” if a borrow is generated. To  
determine whether a calculation has generated a carry, the C flag  
must be initialized to “0” before each calculation. To check for a  
borrow, the C flag must be initialized to “1” before each calculation.  
Rev.1.00 Apr 2, 2007  
REJ03B0212-0100  
Page 92 of 117  
3803 Group (Spec.L)  
Countermeasures against noise  
(1) Shortest wiring length  
Noise  
1. Wiring for RESET pin  
Make the length of wiring which is connected to the RESET  
pin as short as possible. Especially, connect a capacitor across  
the RESET pin and the VSS pin with the shortest possible  
wiring (within 20mm).  
XIN  
XIN  
<Reason>  
The width of a pulse input into the RESET pin is determined by  
the timing necessary conditions. If noise having a shorter pulse  
width than the standard is input to the RESET pin, the reset is  
released before the internal state of the microcomputer is com-  
pletely initialized. This may cause a program runaway.  
XOUT  
VSS  
XOUT  
VSS  
N.G.  
O.K.  
Noise  
Fig 91. Wiring for clock I/O pins  
(2) Connection of bypass capacitor across VSS line and VCC line  
In order to stabilize the system operation and avoid the latch-up,  
connect an approximately 0.1 µF bypass capacitor across the VSS  
line and the VCC line as follows:  
Reset  
RESET  
circuit  
VSS  
VSS  
• Connect a bypass capacitor across the VSS pin and the VCC pin  
at equal length.  
• Connect a bypass capacitor across the VSS pin and the VCC pin  
with the shortest possible wiring.  
N.G.  
• Use lines with a larger diameter than other signal lines for VSS  
line and VCC line.  
• Connect the power source wiring via a bypass capacitor to the  
VSS pin and the VCC pin.  
Reset  
circuit  
RESET  
VSS  
VSS  
VCC  
O.K.  
VCC  
Fig 90. Wiring for the RESET pin  
2. Wiring for clock input/output pins  
• Make the length of wiring which is connected to clock I/O  
pins as short as possible.  
• Make the length of wiring (within 20 mm) across the  
grounding lead of a capacitor which is connected to an  
oscillator and the VSS pin of a microcomputer as short as  
possible.  
VSS  
VSS  
N.G.  
O.K.  
• Separate the VSS pattern only for oscillation from other VSS  
pat-terns.  
Fig 92. Bypass capacitor across the VSS line and the  
VCC line  
<Reason>  
If noise enters clock I/O pins, clock waveforms may be  
deformed. This may cause a program failure or program  
runaway. Also, if a potential difference is caused by the noise  
between the VSS level of a microcomputer and the VSS level of  
an oscillator, the correct clock will not be input in the  
microcomputer.  
Rev.1.00 Apr 2, 2007  
REJ03B0212-0100  
Page 93 of 117  
3803 Group (Spec.L)  
(3) Oscillator concerns  
(4) Analog input  
In order to obtain the stabilized operation clock on the user  
system and its condition, contact the oscillator manufacturer and  
select the oscillator and oscillation circuit constants. Be careful  
espe-cially when range of votage and temperature is wide.  
Also, take care to prevent an oscillator that generates clocks for a  
microcomputer operation from being affected by other signals.  
The analog input pin is connected to the capacitor of a voltage  
com-parator. Accordingly, sufficient accuracy may not be  
obtained by the charge/discharge current at the time of A/D  
conversion when the analog signal source of high-impedance is  
connected to an analog input pin. In order to obtain the A/D  
conversion result stabilized more, please lower the impedance of  
an analog signal source, or add the smoothing capacitor to an  
analog input pin.  
1. Keeping oscillator away from large current signal lines  
Install a microcomputer (and especially an oscillator) as far as  
possible from signal lines where a current larger than the toler-  
ance of current value flows.  
(5) Difference of memory size  
When memory size differ in one group, actual values such as an  
electrical characteristics, A/D conversion accuracy, and the  
amount of -proof of noise incorrect operation may differ from the  
ideal values. When these products are used switching, perform  
system evalua-tion for each product of every after confirming  
product specification.  
<Reason>  
In the system using a microcomputer, there are signal lines for  
controlling motors, LEDs, and thermal heads or others. When a  
large current flows through those signal lines, strong noise  
occurs because of mutual inductance.  
(6) Wiring to CNVSS pin  
The CNVSS pin determines the flash memory mode.  
Connect the CNVSS pin the shortest possible to the GND pattern  
which is supplied to the VSS pin of the microcomputer.  
In addition connecting an approximately 5 k. resistor in series  
to the GND could improve noise immunity. In this case as well  
as the above mention, connect the pin the shortest possible to the  
GND pattern which is supplied to the VSS pin of the  
microcomputer.  
2. Installing oscillator away from signal lines where potential  
levels change frequently  
Install an oscillator and a connecting pattern of an oscillator  
away from signal lines where potential levels change fre-  
quently. Also, do not cross such signal lines over the clock  
lines or the signal lines which are sensitive to noise.  
<Reason>  
Signal lines where potential levels change frequently (such as the  
CNTR pin signal line) may affect other lines at signal rising edge  
or falling edge. If such lines cross over a clock line, clock wave-  
forms may be deformed, which causes a microcomputer failure  
or a program runaway.  
Note. When the boot mode or the standard serial I/O mode is used, a  
switch of the input level to the CNVSS pin is required.  
(Note)  
The shortest  
CNVSS  
1. Keeping oscillator away from large current signal lines  
Approx. 5kΩ  
VSS  
Microcomputer  
Mutual inductance  
M
(Note)  
The shortest  
XIN  
XOUT  
Large  
current  
VSS  
Note: Shows the microcomputer’s pin.  
GND  
2. Installing oscillator away from signal lines where potential  
levels change frequently  
Fig 94. Wiring for the CNVSS  
Do not cross  
CNTR  
XIN  
XOUT  
VSS  
N.G.  
Fig 93. Wiring for a large current signal line/Wiring of  
signal lines where potential levels change  
frequently  
Rev.1.00 Apr 2, 2007  
REJ03B0212-0100  
Page 94 of 117  
3803 Group (Spec.L)  
NOTES ON PERIPHERAL FUNCTIONS  
Notes on Input and Output Ports  
Termination of Unused Pins  
1. Terminate unused pins  
1. Notes in standby state  
(1) Output ports : Open  
In standby state*1 for low-power dissipation, do not make input  
levels of an I/O port “undefined”. Even when an I/O port of  
Nchannel open-drain is set as output mode, if output data is “1”,  
the aforementioned notes are necessary.  
Pull-up (connect the port to VCC) or pull-down (connect the port  
to VSS) these ports through a resistor.  
When determining a resistance value, note the following points:  
• External circuit  
• Variation of output levels during the ordinary operation  
When using built-in pull-up resistor, note on varied current  
values:  
• When setting as an input port : Fix its input level  
• When setting as an output port : Prevent current from flowing  
out to external  
(2) I/O ports :  
• Set the I/O ports for the input mode and connect them to VCC  
or VSS through each resistor of 1 kto 10 k.  
Ports that permit the selecting of a built-in pull-up resistor can  
also use this resistor. Set the I/O ports for the output mode and  
open them at “L” or “H”.  
• When opening them in the output mode, the input mode of the  
initial status remains until the mode of the ports is switched  
over to the output mode by the program after reset. Thus, the  
potential at these pins is undefined and the power source  
current may increase in the input mode. With regard to an  
effects on the system, thoroughly perform system evaluation  
on the user side.  
• Since the direction register setup may be changed because of a  
program runaway or noise, set direction registers by program  
periodically to increase the reliability of program.  
<Reason>  
Exclusive input ports are always in a high-impedance state. An  
output transistor becomes an OFF state when an I/O port is set as  
input mode by the direction register, so that the port enter a  
highimpedance state. At this time, the potential which is input to  
the input buffer in a microcomputer is unstable in the state that  
input levels are “undefined”. This may cause power source  
current.  
(3) The AVSS pin when not using the A/D converter :  
• When not using the A/D converter, handle a power source pin  
for the A/D converter, AVSS pin as follows:  
Even when an I/O port of N-channel open-drain is set as output  
mode by the direction register, if the contents of the port latch is  
“1”, the same phenomenon as that of an input port will occur.  
AVSS: Connect to the VSS pin.  
2. Termination remarks  
*1 Standby state : stop mode by executing STP instruction  
wait mode by executing WIT instruction  
(1) I/O ports :  
Do not open in the input mode.  
<Reason>  
• The power source current may increase depending on the  
firststage circuit.  
• An effect due to noise may be easily produced as compared  
with proper termination (2) in 1 and shown on the above.  
2. Modifying output data with bit managing instruction  
When the port latch of an I/O port is modified with the bit  
managing instruction*1, the value of the unspecified bit may be  
changed.  
<Reason>  
(2) I/O ports :  
I/O ports are set to input or output mode in bit units. Reading  
from a port register or writing to it involves the following  
operations.  
When setting for the input mode, do not connect to VCC or VSS  
directly.  
<Reason>  
If the direction register setup changes for the output mode  
because of a program runaway or noise, a short circuit may occur  
between a port and VCC (or VSS).  
• Port in input mode  
Read: Read the pin level.  
Write: Write to the port latch.  
• Port in output mode  
Read: Read the port latch or read the output from the peripheral  
function (specifications differ depending on the port).  
Write: Write to the port latch. (The port latch value is output  
from the pin.)  
(3) I/O ports :  
When setting for the input mode, do not connect multiple ports in  
a lump to VCC or VSS through a resistor.  
<Reason>  
If the direction register setup changes for the output mode  
because of a program runaway or noise, a short circuit may occur  
between ports.  
Since bit managing instructions*1 are read-modify-write  
instructions,*2 using such an instruction on a port register causes  
a read and write to be performed simultaneously on the bits other  
than the one specified by the instruction.  
When an unspecified bit is in input mode, its pin level is read and  
that value is written to the port latch. If the previous value of the  
port latch differs from the pin level, the port latch value is changed.  
If an unspecified bit is in output mode, the port latch is generally  
read. However, for some ports the peripheral function output is  
read, and the value is written to the port latch. In this case, if the  
previous value of the port latch differs from the peripheral  
function output, the port latch value is changed.  
• At the termination of unused pins, perform wiring at the  
shortest possible distance (20 mm or less) from micro-  
computer pins.  
*1 Bit managing instructions: SEB and CLB instructions  
*2 Read-modify-write instructions: Instructions that read memory  
in byte units, modify the value, and then write the result to the  
same location in memory in byte units  
Rev.1.00 Apr 2, 2007  
REJ03B0212-0100  
Page 95 of 117  
3803 Group (Spec.L)  
Notes on Interrupts  
2. Check of interrupt request bit  
When executing the BBC or BBS instruction to an interrupt  
request bit of an interrupt request register immediately after this  
bit is set to “0”, execute one or more instructions before  
executing the BBC or BBS instruction.  
1. Change of relevant register settings  
When the setting of the following registers or bits is changed, the  
interrupt request bit may be set to “1”. When not requiring the  
interrupt occurrence synchronized with these setting, take the  
following sequence.  
• Interrupt edge selection register (address 003A16)  
• Timer XY mode register (address 002316)  
• Timer Z mode register (address 002A16)  
Clear the interrupt request bit to “0” (no interrupt issued)  
Set the above listed registers or bits as the following sequence.  
NOP (one or more instructions)  
Set the corresponding interrupt enable bit to “0” (disabled).  
Execute the BBC or BBS instruction  
Set the interrupt edge select bit (active edge switch bit)  
or the interrupt (source) select bit to “1”.  
Fig 96. Sequence of check of interrupt request bit  
<Reason>  
NOP (one or more instructions)  
If the BBC or BBS instruction is executed immediately after an  
interrupt request bit of an interrupt request register is cleared to  
“0”, the value of the interrupt request bit before being cleared to  
“0” is read.  
Set the corresponding interrupt request bit to “0”  
(no interrupt request issued).  
Set the corresponding interrupt enable bit to “1” (enabled).  
Fig 95. Sequence of changing relevant register  
<Reason>  
When setting the followings, the interrupt request bit may be set  
to “1”.  
• When setting external interrupt active edge  
Concerned register: Interrupt edge selection register  
(address 003A16)  
Timer XY mode register (address 002316)  
Timer Z mode register (address 002A16)  
• When switching interrupt sources of an interrupt vector  
address where two or more interrupt sources are allocated.  
Concerned register: Interrupt source selection register  
(address 003916)  
Rev.1.00 Apr 2, 2007  
REJ03B0212-0100  
Page 96 of 117  
3803 Group (Spec.L)  
Notes on 8-bit Timer (timer 1, 2, X, Y)  
5. Programmable one-shot generating mode  
• If a value n (between 0 and 255) is written to a timer latch, the  
frequency division ratio is 1/(n+1).  
• When switching the count source by the timer 12, X and Y  
count source selection bits, the value of timer count is altered  
in unconsiderable amount owing to generating of thin pulses in  
the count input signals.  
• Set the double-function port of CNTR2 pin and port P47 to  
output, and of INT1 pin and port P42 to input in this mode.  
• This mode cannot be used in low-speed mode.  
• If the value of the CNTR2 active edge switch bit is changed  
during one-shot generating enabled or generating one-shot  
pulse, then the output level from CNTR2 pin changes.  
Therefore, select the timer count source before set the value to  
the prescaler and the timer.  
6. All modes  
• Set the double-function port of the CNTR0/CNTR1 pin and  
port P54/P55 to output in the pulse output mode.  
• Set the double-function port of CNTR0/CNTR1 pin and port  
P54/P55 to input in the event counter mode and the pulse width  
measurement mode.  
• Timer Z write control  
Which write control can be selected by the timer Z write control  
bit (bit 3) of the timer Z mode register (address 002A16), writing  
data to both the latch and the timer at the same time or writing  
data only to the latch.  
When the operation “writing data only to the latch” is selected,  
the value is set to the timer latch by writing data to the address of  
timer Z and the timer is updated at next underflow. After reset  
release, the operation “writing data to both the latch and the timer  
at the same time” is selected, and the value is set to both the latch  
and the timer at the same time by writing data to the address of  
timer Z.  
Notes on 16-bit Timer (timer Z)  
1. Pulse output mode  
• Set the double-function port of the CNTR2 pin and port P47 to  
output.  
In the case of writing data only to the latch, if writing data to the  
latch and an underflow are performed almost at the same time,  
the timer value may become undefined.  
2. Pulse period measurement mode  
• Set the double-function port of the CNTR2 pin and port P47 to  
input.  
• A read-out of timer value is impossible in this mode. The timer  
can be written to only during timer stop (no measurement of  
pulse period).  
• Timer Z read control  
A read-out of timer value is impossible in pulse period  
measurement mode and pulse width measurement mode. In the  
other modes, a read-out of timer value is possible regardless of  
count operating or stopped.  
• Since the timer latch in this mode is specialized for the read-  
out of measured values, do not perform any write operation  
during measurement.  
• “FFFF16” is set to the timer when the timer underflows or  
when the valid edge of measurement start/completion is  
detected.  
Consequently, the timer value at start of pulse period  
measurement depends on the timer value just before  
measurement start.  
However, a read-out of timer latch value is impossible.  
• Switch of interrupt active edge of CNTR2 and INT1  
Each interrupt active edge depends on setting of the CNTR2  
active edge switch bit and the INT1 active edge selection bit.  
• Switch of count source  
When switching the count source by the timer Z count source  
selection bits, the value of timer count is altered in  
inconsiderable amount owing to generating of thin pulses on the  
count input signals.  
Therefore, select the timer count source before setting the value  
to the prescaler and the timer.  
3. Pulse width measurement mode  
• Set the double-function port of the CNTR2 pin and port P47 to  
input.  
• A read-out of timer value is impossible in this mode. The timer  
can be written to only during timer stop (no measurement of  
pulse period).  
• Since the timer latch in this mode is specialized for the read-  
out of measured values, do not perform any write operation  
during measurement.  
• “FFFF16” is set to the timer when the timer underflows or  
when the valid edge of measurement start/completion is  
detected.  
Consequently, the timer value at start of pulse width  
measurement depends on the timer value just before  
measurement start.  
4. Programmable waveform generating mode  
• Set the double-function port of the CNTR2 pin and port P47 to  
output.  
Rev.1.00 Apr 2, 2007  
REJ03B0212-0100  
Page 97 of 117  
3803 Group (Spec.L)  
Notes on Serial Interface  
3. SRDYi (i = 1, 3) output of reception side  
1. Notes when selecting clock synchronous serial I/O  
When signals are output from the SRDYi pin on the reception side  
by using an external clock in the clock synchronous serial I/O  
mode, set all of the receive enable bit, the SRDYi output enable  
bit, and the transmit enable bit to “1” (transmit enabled).  
(1) Stop of transmission operation  
As for serial I/Oi (i = 1, 3) that can be used as either a clock  
synchronous or an asynchronous (UART) serial I/O, clear the  
serial I/Oi enable bit and the transmit enable bit to “0” (serial  
I/Oi and transmit disabled).  
4. Setting serial I/Oi (i = 1, 3) control register again  
<Reason>  
Set the serial I/Oi control register again after the transmission  
and the reception circuits are reset by clearing both the transmit  
enable bit and the receive enable bit to “0.”  
Since transmission is not stopped and the transmission circuit is  
not initialized even if only the serial I/Oi enable bit is cleared to  
“0” (serial I/Oi disabled), the internal transmission is running (in  
this case, since pins TxDi, RxDi, SCLKi, and SRDYi function as  
I/O ports, the transmission data is not output). When data is  
written to the transmit buffer register in this state, data starts to  
be shifted to the transmit shift register. When the serial I/Oi  
enable bit is set to “1” at this time, the data during internally  
shifting is output to the TxDi pin and an operation failure occurs.  
Clear both the transmit enable bit (TE) and  
the receive enable bit (RE) to “0”  
Set the bits 0 to 3 and bit 6 of the serial I/Oi  
control register  
(2) Stop of receive operation  
Can be set with the  
LDM instruction at  
the same time  
As for serial I/Oi (i = 1, 3) that can be used as either a clock  
synchronous or an asynchronous (UART) serial I/O, clear the  
receive enable bit to “0” (receive disabled), or clear the serial  
I/Oi enable bit to “0” (serial I/Oi disabled).  
Set both the transmit enable bit (TE) and the  
receive enable bit (RE), or one of them to “1”  
(3) Stop of transmit/receive operation  
Fig 97. Sequence of setting serial I/Oi (i = 1, 3) control  
register again  
As for serial I/Oi (i = 1, 3) that can be used as either a clock  
synchronous or an asynchronous (UART) serial I/O, clear both  
the transmit enable bit and receive enable bit to “0” (transmit and  
receive disabled).  
(when data is transmitted and received in the clock synchronous  
serial I/O mode, any one of data transmission and reception  
cannot be stopped.)  
5. Data transmission control with referring to transmit  
shift register completion flag  
After the transmit data is written to the transmit buffer register,  
the transmit shift register completion flag changes from “1” to  
“0” with a delay of 0.5 to 1.5 shift clocks. When data  
transmission is controlled with referring to the flag after writing  
the data to the transmit buffer register, note the delay.  
<Reason>  
In the clock synchronous serial I/O mode, the same clock is used  
for transmission and reception. If any one of transmission and  
reception is disabled, a bit error occurs because transmission and  
reception cannot be synchronized.  
In this mode, the clock circuit of the transmission circuit also  
operates for data reception. Accordingly, the transmission circuit  
does not stop by clearing only the transmit enable bit to “0”  
(transmit disabled). Also, the transmission circuit is not  
initialized by clearing the serial I/Oi enable bit to “0” (serial I/Oi  
disabled) (refer to (1) in 1.).  
6. Transmission control when external clock is selected  
When an external clock is used as the synchronous clock for data  
transmission, set the transmit enable bit to “1” at “H” of the  
SCLKi (i = 1, 3) input level. Also, write the transmit data to the  
transmit buffer register at “H” of the SCLKi input level.  
7. Transmit interrupt request when transmit enable bit  
is set  
2. Notes when selecting clock asynchronous serial I/O  
When using the transmit interrupt, take the following sequence.  
(1) Set the serial I/Oi transmit interrupt enable bit (i = 1, 3) to  
“0” (disabled).  
(1) Stop of transmission operation  
Clear the transmit enable bit to “0” (transmit disabled). The  
transmission operation does not stop by clearing the serial I/Oi  
enable bit (i = 1, 3) to “0”.  
(2) Set the tranasmit enable bit to “1”.  
<Reason>  
This is the same as (1) in 1.  
(3) Set the serial I/Oi transmit interrupt request bit (i = 1, 3) to  
“0” after 1 or more instruction has executed.  
(4) Set the serial I/Oi transmit interrupt enable bit (i = 1, 3) to  
“1” (enabled).  
(2) Stop of receive operation  
Clear the receive enable bit to “0” (receive disabled).  
<Reason>  
When the transmission enable bit is set to “1”, the transmit buffer  
empty flag and transmit shift register shift completion flag are  
also set to “1”.  
Therefore, regardless of selecting which timing for the  
generating of transmit interrupts, the interrupt request is  
generated and the transmit interrupt request bit is set at this point.  
(3) Stop of transmit/receive operation  
Only transmission operation is stopped.  
Clear the transmit enable bit to “0” (transmit disabled). The  
transmission operation does not stop by clearing the serial I/Oi  
enable bit (i = 1, 3) to “0”.  
<Reason>  
This is the same as (1) in 1.  
Only receive operation is stopped.  
8. Writing to baud rate generator i (BRGi) (i = 1, 3)  
Write data to the baud rate generator i (BRGi) (i = 1, 3) while the  
transmission/reception operation is stopped.  
Clear the receive enable bit to “0” (receive disabled).  
Rev.1.00 Apr 2, 2007  
REJ03B0212-0100  
Page 98 of 117  
3803 Group (Spec.L)  
Notes on PWM  
Notes on Watchdog Timer  
The PWM starts from “H” level after the PWM enable bit is set  
to enable and “L” level is temporarily output from the PWM pin.  
The length of this “L” level output is as follows:  
• Make sure that the watchdog timer H does not underflow  
while waiting Stop release, because the watchdog timer keeps  
counting during that term.  
• When the STP instruction disable bit has been set to “1”, it is  
impossible to switch it to “0” by a program.  
n + 1  
2 × f(XIN)  
(s) (Count source selection bit = “0”,  
where n is the value set in the prescaler)  
n + 1  
f(XIN)  
Notes on RESET Pin  
(s) (Count source selection bit = “1”,  
where n is the value set in the prescaler)  
Connecting capacitor  
In case where the RESET signal rise time is long, connect a  
ceramic capacitor or others across the RESET pin and the VSS  
pin.  
Use a 1000 pF or more capacitor for high frequency use. When  
connecting the capacitor, note the following :  
• Make the length of the wiring which is connected to a  
capacitor as short as possible.  
• Be sure to verify the operation of application products on the  
user side.  
<Reason>  
Notes on A/D Converter  
1. Analog input pin  
Make the signal source impedance for analog input low, or equip  
an analog input pin with an external capacitor of 0.01 µF to 1 µF.  
Further, be sure to verify the operation of application products on  
the user side.  
<Reason>  
An analog input pin includes the capacitor for analog voltage  
comparison. Accordingly, when signals from signal source with  
high impedance are input to an analog input pin, charge and  
discharge noise generates. This may cause the A/D conversion  
precision to be worse.  
If the several nanosecond or several ten nanosecond impulse  
noise enters the RESET pin, it may cause a microcomputer  
failure.  
Notes on Low-speed Operation Mode  
1. Using sub-clock  
2. A/D converter power source pin  
The AVSS pin is A/D converter power source pins. Regardless of  
using the A/D conversion function or not, connect it as following :  
• AVSS : Connect to the VSS line  
To use a sub-clock, fix bit 3 of the CPU mode register to “1” or  
control the Rd (refer to Figure 98) resistance value to a certain  
level to stabilize an oscillation. For resistance value of Rd,  
consult the oscillator manufacturer.  
<Reason>  
If the AVSS pin is opened, the microcomputer may have a failure  
because of noise or others.  
3. Clock frequency during A/D conversion  
The comparator consists of a capacity coupling, and a charge of  
the capacity will be lost if the clock frequency is too low. Thus,  
make sure the following during an A/D conversion.  
• f(XIN) is 500 kHz or more  
XCIN  
XCOUT  
Rf  
• Do not execute the STP instruction  
Rd  
4. Difference between at 8-bit reading in 10-bit A/D  
mode and at 8-bit A/D mode  
CCIN  
CCOUT  
At 8-bit reading in the 10-bit A/D mode, “–1/2 LSB” correction  
is not performed to the A/D conversion result.  
Fig 98. Ceramic resonator circuit  
In the 8-bit A/D mode, the A/D conversion characteristics is the  
same as 3802 group’s characteristics because “–1/2 LSB”  
correction is performed.  
<Reason>  
When bit 3 of the CPU mode register is set to “0”, the sub-clock  
oscillation may stop.  
Notes on D/A Converter  
2. Switch between middle/high-speed mode and low-  
speed mode  
1. VCC when using D/A converter  
If you switch the mode between middle/high-speed and low-  
speed, stabilize both XIN and XCIN oscillations. The sufficient  
time is required for the sub clock to stabilize, especially  
immediately after power on and at returning from stop mode.  
When switching the mode between middle/high-speed and low-  
speed, set the frequency on condition that f(XIN) > 3 × f(XCIN).  
The D/A converter accuracy when VCC is 4.0 V or less differs  
from that of when VCC is 4.0 V or more. When using the D/A  
converter, we recommend using a VCC of 4.0 V or more.  
2. DAi conversion register when not using D/A con-  
verter  
When a D/A converter is not used, set all values of the DAi  
conversion registers (i = 1, 2) to “0016”. The initial value after  
reset is “0016”.  
Quartz-Crystal Oscillator  
When using the quartz-crystal oscillator of high frequency, such  
as 16 MHz etc., it may be necessary to select a specific oscillator  
with the specification demanded.  
Rev.1.00 Apr 2, 2007  
REJ03B0212-0100  
Page 99 of 117  
3803 Group (Spec.L)  
Notes on Restarting Oscillation  
4. Watchdog timer  
• Restarting oscillation  
In case of the watchdog timer has been running already, the  
internal reset generated by watchdog timer underflow does not  
happen, because of watchdog timer is always clearing during  
program or erase operation.  
Usually, when the MCU stops the clock oscillation by STP  
instruction and the STP instruction has been released by an  
external interrupt source, the fixed values of Timer 1 and  
Prescaler 12 (Timer 1 = “0116”, Prescaler 12 = “FF16”) are  
automatically reloaded in order for the oscillation to stabilize.  
The user can inhibit the automatic setting by writing “1” to bit 0  
of MISRG (address 001016).  
However, by setting this bit to “1”, the previous values, set just  
before the STP instruction was executed, will remain in Timer 1  
and Prescaler 12. Therefore, you will need to set an appropriate  
value to each register, in accordance with the oscillation  
stabilizing time, before executing the STP instruction.  
<Reason>  
5. Reset  
Reset is always valid. In case of CNVSS = “H” when reset is  
released, boot mode is active. So the program starts from the  
address contained in address FFFC16 and FFFD16 in boot ROM  
area.  
Notes on flash memory version  
The CNVSS pin determines the flash memory mode.  
Connect the CNVSS pin the shortest possible to the GND pattern  
which is supplied to the VSS pin of the microcomputer.  
In addition connecting an approximately 5 k. resistor in series  
to the GND could improve noise immunity. In this case as well  
as the above mention, connect the pin the shortest possible to the  
GND pattern which is supplied to the VSS pin of the  
microcomputer.  
Oscillation will restart when an external interrupt is received.  
However, internal clock φ is supplied to the CPU only when  
Timer 1 starts to underflow. This ensures time for the clock  
oscillation using the ceramic resonators to be stabilized.  
Notes on Using Stop Mode  
• Register setting  
Since values of the prescaler 12 and Timer 1 are automatically  
reloaded when returning from the stop mode, set them again,  
respectively. (When the oscillation stabilizing time set after STP  
instruction released bit is “0”)  
Note. When the boot mode or the standard serial I/O mode is used, a  
switch of the input level to the CNVSS pin is required.  
• Clock restoration  
After restoration from the stop mode to the normal mode by an  
interrupt request, the contents of the CPU mode register previous  
to the STP instruction execution are retained. Accordingly, if  
both main clock and sub clock were oscillating before execution  
of the STP instruction, the oscillation of both clocks is resumed  
at restoration.  
In the above case, when the main clock side is set as a system  
clock, the oscillation stabilizing time for approximately 8,000  
cycles of the XIN input is reserved at restoration from the stop  
mode. At this time, note that the oscillation on the sub clock side  
may not be stabilized even after the lapse of the oscillation  
stabilizing time of the main clock side.  
(Note)  
The shortest  
CNVSS  
Approx. 5kΩ  
VSS  
(Note)  
The shortest  
Note: Shows the microcomputer’s pin.  
Fig 99. Wiring for the CNVSS  
Notes on Wait Mode  
• Clock restoration  
If the wait mode is released by a reset when XCIN is set as the  
system clock and XIN oscillation is stopped during execution of  
the WIT instruction, XCIN oscillation stops, XIN oscillations  
starts, and XIN is set as the system clock.  
In the above case, the RESET pin should be held at “L” until the  
oscillation is stabilized.  
Notes on electric characteristic differences between  
mask ROM and flash nemory version MCUs  
There are differences in electric characteristics, operation  
margin, noise immunity, and noise radiation between Mask  
ROM and Flash Memory version MCUs due to the difference in  
the manufacturing processes, built-in ROM, and layout pattern  
etc. When manufacturing an application system with the Flash  
Memory version and then switching to use of the Mask ROM  
version, please conduct evaluations equivalent to the system  
evaluations conducted for the flash memory version.  
Notes on CPU rewrite mode of flash memory version  
1. Operation speed  
During CPU rewrite mode, set the system clock φ 4.0 MHz or  
less using the main clock division ratio selection bits (bits 6 and  
7 of address 003B16).  
DATA REQUIRED FOR MASK ORDERS  
The following are necessary when ordering a mask ROM  
production:  
2. Instructions inhibited against use  
1. Mask ROM Confirmation Form*  
2. Mark Specification Form*  
The instructions which refer to the internal data of the flash  
memory cannot be used during the CPU rewrite mode.  
3. Data to be written to ROM, in EPROM form (three identical  
copies)  
* For the mask ROM confirmation and the mark specifications,  
refer to the “Renesas Technology Corp.” Homepage  
(http://www.renesas.com/en/rom).  
3. Interrupts inhibited against use  
The interrupts cannot be used during the CPU rewrite mode  
because they refer to the internal data of the flash memory.  
Rev.1.00 Apr 2, 2007  
REJ03B0212-0100  
Page 100 of 117  
3803 Group (Spec.L)  
Notes on Handling of Power Source Pins  
In order to avoid a latch-up occurrence, connect a capacitor  
suitable for high frequencies as bypass capacitor between power  
source pin (VCC pin) and GND pin (VSS pin), and between power  
source pin (VCC pin) and analog power source input pin (AVSS  
pin). Besides, connect the capacitor to as close as possible. For  
bypass capacitor which should not be located too far from the  
pins to be connected, a ceramic capacitor of 0.01 µF–0.1 µF is  
recommended.  
Power Source Voltage  
When the power source voltage value of a microcomputer is less  
than the value which is indicated as the recommended operating  
conditions, the microcomputer does not operate normally and  
may perform unstable operation.  
In a system where the power source voltage drops slowly when  
the power source voltage drops or the power supply is turned off,  
reset a microcomputer when the power source voltage is less  
than the recommended operating conditions and design a system  
not to cause errors to the system by this unstable operation.  
Rev.1.00 Apr 2, 2007  
REJ03B0212-0100  
Page 101 of 117  
3803 Group (Spec.L)  
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS  
Absolute maximum ratings  
Table 16 Absolute maximum ratings  
Symbol  
VCC  
Parameter  
Conditions  
Ratings  
0.3 to 6.5  
0.3 to VCC + 0.3  
Unit  
V
Power source voltages  
All voltages are based on VSS.  
When an input voltage is  
measured, output transistors  
are cut off.  
VI  
Input voltage  
P00-P07, P10-P17, P20-P27,  
P30, P31, P34-P37, P40-P47,  
P50-P57, P60-P67, VREF  
V
VI  
VI  
Input voltage  
Input voltage  
P32, P33  
RESET, XIN  
CNVSS  
0.3 to 5.8  
0.3 to VCC + 0.3  
V
V
VI  
Input voltage  
0.3 to VCC + 0.3  
0.3 to VCC + 0.3  
V
V
VO  
Output voltage  
P00-P07, P10-P17, P20-P27,  
P30, P31, P34-P37, P40-P47,  
P50-P57, P60-P67, XOUT  
VO  
Output voltage  
P32, P33  
0.3 to 5.8  
1000(1)  
V
mW  
°C  
Pd  
Power dissipation  
Ta=25 °C  
Topr  
Operating temperature  
Storage temperature  
20 to 85  
65 to 125  
Tstg  
°C  
NOTE:  
1. This value is 300 mW except SP package.  
Rev.1.00 Apr 2, 2007  
REJ03B0212-0100  
Page 102 of 117  
3803 Group (Spec.L)  
Mask ROM Version  
Recommended operating conditions  
Table 17 Recommended operating conditions (1) (Mask ROM version)  
(VCC = 1.8 to 5.5 V, VSS = 0 V, Ta = –20 to 85 °C, unless otherwise noted)  
Limits  
Symbol  
VCC  
Parameter  
Conditions  
Unit  
Min.  
2.2  
2.0  
2.2  
2.7  
4.0  
4.5  
1.8  
2.2  
2.7  
4.5  
Typ.  
5.0  
5.0  
5.0  
5.0  
5.0  
5.0  
5.0  
5.0  
5.0  
5.0  
0
Max.  
5.5  
5.5  
5.5  
5.5  
5.5  
5.5  
5.5  
5.5  
5.5  
5.5  
When start oscillating(2)  
Power source  
voltage(1)  
V
V
High-speed mode  
f(XIN) 2.1 MHz  
f(φ) = f(XIN)/2  
f(XIN) 4.2 MHz  
f(XIN) 8.4 MHz  
f(XIN) 12.5 MHz  
f(XIN) 16.8 MHz  
Middle-speed mode f(XIN) 6.3 MHz  
V
f(φ) = f(XIN)/8  
f(XIN) 8.4 MHz  
f(XIN) 12.5 MHz  
f(XIN) 16.8 MHz  
VSS  
VIH  
Power source voltage  
V
V
“H” input voltage  
P00-P07, P10-P17,  
P20-P27, P30, P31,  
P34-P37, P40-P47,  
P50-P57, P60-P67  
1.8 VCC < 2.7 V  
2.7 VCC 5.5 V  
0.85 VCC  
0.8 VCC  
VCC  
VCC  
VIH  
VIH  
“H” input voltage  
P32, P33  
1.8 VCC < 2.7 V  
2.7 VCC 5.5 V  
1.8 VCC < 2.7 V  
2.7 VCC 5.5 V  
0.85 VCC  
0.8 VCC  
0.85 VCC  
0.8 VCC  
5.5  
5.5  
V
V
“H” input voltage  
RESET, XIN, XCIN,  
CNVSS  
VCC  
VCC  
VIL  
VIL  
“L” input voltage  
P00-P07, P10-P17,  
P20-P27, P30-P37,  
P40-P47, P50-P57,  
P60-P67  
1.8 VCC < 2.7 V  
2.7 VCC 5.5 V  
0
0
0.16 VCC  
0.2 VCC  
V
V
“L” input voltage  
RESET, CNVSS  
1.8 VCC < 2.7 V  
2.7 VCC 5.5 V  
1.8 VCC 5.5 V  
0
0
0
0.16 VCC  
0.2 VCC  
VIL  
“L” input voltage  
XIN, XCIN  
0.16 VCC  
V
f(XIN)  
Main clock input  
oscillation  
frequency(3)  
High-speed mode  
f(φ) = f(XIN)/2  
2.0 VCC < 2.2 V  
2.2 VCC < 2.7 V  
2.7 VCC < 4.0 V  
4.0 VCC < 4.5 V  
4.5 VCC 5.5 V  
MHz  
(20 × VCC 36) × 1.05  
-----------------------------------------------------------  
2
MHz  
MHz  
MHz  
(24 × VCC 40.8) × 1.05  
----------------------------------------------------------------  
3
(9 × VCC 0.3) × 1.05  
---------------------------------------------------------  
3
(24 × VCC 60) × 1.05  
-----------------------------------------------------------  
3
16.8  
MHz  
MHz  
Middle-speed mode 1.8 VCC < 2.2 V  
f(φ) = f(XIN)/8  
(15 × VCC 9) × 1.05  
-------------------------------------------------------  
3
2.2 VCC < 2.7 V  
2.7 VCC < 4.5 V  
4.5 VCC 5.5 V  
MHz  
MHz  
(24 × VCC 28.8) × 1.05  
----------------------------------------------------------------  
3
(15 × VCC + 39) × 1.1  
--------------------------------------------------------  
7
16.8  
50  
MHz  
kHz  
Sub-clock input oscillation frequency(3, 4)  
f(XCIN)  
32.768  
NOTES:  
1. When using A/D converter, see A/D converter recommended operating conditions.  
2. The start voltage and the start time for oscillation depend on the using oscillator, oscillation circuit constant value and operating  
temperature range, etc.. Particularly a high-frequency oscillator might require some notes in the low voltage operation.  
3. When the oscillation frequency has a duty cycle of 50%.  
4. When using the microcomputer in low-speed mode, set the sub-clock input oscillation frequency on condition that f(XCIN) < f(XIN)/3.  
Rev.1.00 Apr 2, 2007  
REJ03B0212-0100  
Page 103 of 117  
3803 Group (Spec.L) Flash Memory Version  
Table 18 Recommended operating conditions (2) (Flash memory version)  
(VCC = 2.7 to 5.5 V, VSS = 0 V, Ta = –20 to 85 °C, unless otherwise noted)  
Limits  
Symbol  
VCC  
Parameter  
Conditions  
Unit  
Min.  
2.2  
2.7  
4.0  
4.5  
2.7  
4.5  
Typ.  
5.0  
5.0  
5.0  
5.0  
5.0  
5.0  
0
Max.  
5.5  
5.5  
5.5  
5.5  
5.5  
5.5  
When start oscillating(2)  
Power source  
voltage(1)  
V
V
High-speed mode  
f(XIN) 8.4 MHz  
f(φ) = f(XIN)/2  
f(XIN) 12.5 MHz  
f(XIN) 16.8 MHz  
Middle-speed mode f(XIN) 12.5 MHz  
V
f(φ) = f(XIN)/8  
f(XIN) 16.8 MHz  
VSS  
VIH  
Power source voltage  
V
V
“H” input voltage  
P00-P07, P10-P17,  
P20-P27, P30, P31,  
P34-P37, P40-P47,  
P50-P57, P60-P67  
0.8 VCC  
VCC  
VIH  
VIH  
“H” input voltage  
P32, P33  
0.8 VCC  
0.8 VCC  
5.5  
V
V
“H” input voltage  
RESET, XIN,  
CNVSS  
VCC  
VIH  
VIL  
“H” input voltage  
XCIN  
2
0
VCC  
V
V
“L” input voltage  
P00-P07, P10-P17,  
P20-P27, P30-P37,  
P40-P47, P50-P57,  
P60-P67  
0.2 VCC  
VIL  
“L” input voltage  
RESET, CNVSS  
0
0.2 VCC  
0.16 VCC  
0.4  
V
V
VIL  
“L” input voltage  
XIN  
VIL  
“L” input voltage  
XCIN  
V
f(XIN)  
Main clock input  
oscillation  
frequency(3)  
High-speed mode  
f(φ) = f(XIN)/2  
2.7 VCC < 4.0 V  
4.0 VCC < 4.5 V  
4.5 VCC 5.5 V  
MHz  
(9 × VCC 0.3) × 1.05  
---------------------------------------------------------  
3
MHz  
(24 × VCC 60) × 1.05  
-----------------------------------------------------------  
3
16.8  
MHz  
MHz  
Middle-speed mode 2.7 VCC < 4.5 V  
f(φ) = f(XIN)/8  
(15 × VCC + 39) × 1.1  
--------------------------------------------------------  
7
4.5 VCC 5.5 V  
16.8  
50  
MHz  
kHz  
f(XCIN)  
Sub-clock input  
oscillation  
32.768  
frequency(3, 4)  
NOTES:  
1. When using A/D converter, see A/D converter recommended operating conditions.  
2. The start voltage and the start time for oscillation depend on the using oscillator, oscillation circuit constant value and operating  
temperature range, etc.. Particularly a high-frequency oscillator might require some notes in the low voltage operation.  
3. When the oscillation frequency has a duty cycle of 50%.  
4. When using the microcomputer in low-speed mode, set the sub-clock input oscillation frequency on condition that f(XCIN) < f(XIN)/3.  
Rev.1.00 Apr 2, 2007  
REJ03B0212-0100  
Page 104 of 117  
3803 Group (Spec.L)  
Table 19 Recommended operating conditions (3)  
(Mask ROM version: VCC = 1.8 to 5.5 V, VSS = 0 V, Ta = –20 to 85 °C, unless otherwise noted)  
(Flash memory version: VCC = 2.7 to 5.5 V, VSS = 0 V, Ta = –20 to 85 °C, unless otherwise noted)  
Limits  
Symbol  
Parameter  
Unit  
Min.  
Typ.  
Max.  
80  
80  
80  
“H” total peak output current(1)  
“H” total peak output current(1)  
“L” total peak output current(1)  
“L” total peak output current(1)  
“L” total peak output current(1)  
“H” total average output current(1)  
“H” total average output current(1)  
“L” total average output current(1)  
“L” total average output current(1)  
“L” total average output current(1)  
“H” peak output current(2)  
ΣIOH(peak)  
ΣIOH(peak)  
ΣIOL(peak)  
ΣIOL(peak)  
ΣIOL(peak)  
ΣIOH(avg)  
ΣIOH(avg)  
ΣIOL(avg)  
ΣIOL(avg)  
ΣIOL(avg)  
IOH(peak)  
P00-P07, P10-P17, P20-P27, P30, P31, P34-P37  
P40-P47, P50-P57, P60-P67  
P00-P07, P10-P17, P30-P37  
P20-P27  
mA  
mA  
mA  
mA  
mA  
mA  
mA  
mA  
mA  
mA  
mA  
80  
P40-P47, P50-P57, P60-P67  
P00-P07, P10-P17, P20-P27, P30, P31, P34-P37  
P40-P47, P50-P57, P60-P67  
P00-P07, P10-P17, P30-P37  
P20-P27  
80  
40  
40  
40  
40  
P40-P47, P50-P57, P60-P67  
40  
P00-P07, P10-P17, P20-P27, P30, P31, P34-P37,  
P40-P47, P50-P57, P60-P67  
10  
“L” peak output current(2)  
IOL(peak)  
P00-P07, P10-P17, P30-P37, P40-P47, P50-P57,  
P60-P67  
10  
mA  
“L” peak output current(2)  
“H” average output current(3)  
IOL(peak)  
IOH(avg)  
P20-P27  
20  
mA  
mA  
P00-P07, P10-P17, P20-P27, P30, P31, P34-P37,  
P40-P47, P50-P57, P60-P67  
5  
“L” average output current(3)  
“L” average output current(3)  
IOL(avg)  
P00-P07, P10-P17, P30-P37, P40-P47, P50-P57,  
P60-P67  
5
mA  
mA  
IOL(avg)  
P20-P27  
10  
NOTES:  
1. The total output current is the sum of all the currents flowing through all the applicable ports. The total average current is an average  
value measured over 100 ms. The total peak current is the peak value of all the currents.  
2. The peak output current is the peak current flowing in each port.  
3. The average output current IOL(avg), IOH(avg) are average value measured over 100 ms.  
Rev.1.00 Apr 2, 2007  
REJ03B0212-0100  
Page 105 of 117  
3803 Group (Spec.L)  
Electrical characteristics  
Table 20 Electrical characteristics (1)  
(Mask ROM version: VCC = 1.8 to 5.5 V, VSS = 0 V, Ta = –20 to 85 °C, unless otherwise noted)  
(Flash memory version: VCC = 2.7 to 5.5 V, VSS = 0 V, Ta = –20 to 85 °C, unless otherwise noted)  
Limits  
Symbol  
VOH  
Parameter  
“H” output voltage(1)  
Test conditions  
IOH = 10 mA  
Unit  
V
Min.  
Typ.  
Max.  
VCC 2.0  
VCC = 4.0 to 5.5 V  
P00-P07, P10-P17, P20-P27, P30, P31,  
P34-P37, P40-P47, P50-P57, P60-P67  
IOH = –1.0 mA  
VCC 1.0  
VCC = 1.8 to 5.5 V  
VOL  
“L” output voltage  
P00-P07, P10-P17, P20-P27, P30-P37,  
P40-P47, P50-P57, P60-P67  
IOL = 10 mA  
VCC = 4.0 to 5.5 V  
2.0  
1.0  
2.0  
0.4  
V
V
IOL = 1.6 mA  
VCC = 1.8 to 5.5 V  
VOL  
“L” output voltage  
P20-P27  
IOL = 20 mA  
VCC = 4.0 to 5.5 V  
IOL = 1.6 mA  
VCC = 1.8 to 5.5 V  
VT+ VT−  
VT+ VT−  
VT+ VT−  
IIH  
Hysteresis  
CNTR0, CNTR1, CNTR2, INT0-INT4  
0.4  
0.5  
0.5  
V
V
Hysteresis  
RxD1, SCLK1, SIN2, SCLK2, RxD3, SCLK3  
Hysteresis  
RESET  
V
“H” input current  
P00-P07, P10-P17, P20-P27, P30-P37,  
P40-P47, P50-P57, P60-P67  
VI = VCC  
(Pin floating,  
Pull-up transistor “off”)  
5.0  
5.0  
µA  
IIH  
IIH  
IIL  
“H” input current  
RESET, CNVSS  
VI = VCC  
VI = VCC  
µA  
µA  
µA  
“H” input current  
XIN  
4.0  
“L” input current  
P00-P07, P10-P17, P20-P27, P30-P37,  
P40-P47, P50-P57, P60-P67  
VI = VSS  
(Pin floating,  
Pull-up transistor “off”)  
5.0  
5.0  
IIL  
IIL  
IIL  
“L” input current  
RESET, CNVSS  
VI = VSS  
VI = VSS  
µA  
µA  
µA  
“L” input current  
XIN  
4.0  
210  
70  
“L” input current (at Pull-up)  
P00-P07, P10-P17, P20-P27, P30, P31,  
P34-P37, P40-P47, P50-P57, P60-P67  
VI = VSS  
VCC = 5.0 V  
80  
30  
1.8  
420  
140  
VCC  
VI = VSS  
VCC = 3.0 V  
VRAM  
RAM hold voltage  
When clock stopped  
V
NOTE:  
1. P35 is measured when the P35/TXD3 P-channel output disable bit of the UART3 control register (bit 4 of address 003316) is “0”.  
P45 is measured when the P45/TXD1 P-channel output disable bit of the UART1 control register (bit 4 of address 001B16) is “0”.  
Rev.1.00 Apr 2, 2007  
REJ03B0212-0100  
Page 106 of 117  
3803 Group (Spec.L)  
Mask ROM Version  
Table 21 Electrical characteristics (2) (Mask ROM version)  
(VCC = 1.8 to 5.5 V, Ta = –20 to 85 °C, f(XCIN)=32.768 kHz (Stopped in middle-speed mode),  
Output transistors “off”, AD converter not operated)  
Limits  
Symbol  
ICC  
Parameter  
Test conditions  
Unit  
mA  
Min.  
Typ.  
8.0  
6.5  
5.0  
2.5  
2.0  
1.9  
1.0  
0.6  
4.0  
3.0  
2.5  
1.8  
1.5  
1.2  
1.0  
55  
Max.  
15.0  
12.0  
9.0  
5.0  
3.6  
3.8  
2.0  
1.2  
7.0  
6.0  
5.0  
3.3  
3.0  
2.4  
2.0  
200  
70  
Power source High-speed  
current  
VCC = 5.0 V f(XIN) = 16.8 MHz  
f(XIN) = 12.5 MHz  
mode  
f(XIN) = 8.4 MHz  
f(XIN) = 4.2 MHz  
f(XIN) = 16.8 MHz (in WIT state)  
VCC = 3.0 V f(XIN) = 8.4 MHz  
f(XIN) = 4.2 MHz  
mA  
mA  
f(XIN) = 2.1 MHz  
Middle-speed  
mode  
VCC = 5.0 V f(XIN) = 16.8 MHz  
f(XIN) = 12.5 MHz  
f(XIN) = 8.4 MHz  
f(XIN) = 16.8 MHz (in WIT state)  
VCC = 3.0 V f(XIN) = 12.5 MHz  
f(XIN) = 8.4 MHz  
mA  
f(XIN) = 6.3 MHz  
Low-speed  
mode  
VCC = 5.0 V f(XIN) = stopped  
In WIT state  
µA  
µA  
µA  
µA  
µA  
40  
VCC = 3.0 V f(XIN) = stopped  
In WIT state  
15  
40  
8
15  
VCC = 2.0 V f(XIN) = stopped  
In WIT state  
6
15  
3
6
In STP state  
(All oscillation stopped)  
Ta = 25 °C  
Ta = 85 °C  
f(XIN) = 16.8 MHz, VCC = 5.0 V  
In Middle-, high-speed mode  
0.1  
1.0  
10  
Increment when A/D  
conversion is executed  
500  
Rev.1.00 Apr 2, 2007  
REJ03B0212-0100  
Page 107 of 117  
3803 Group (Spec.L) Flash Memory Version  
Table 22 Electrical characteristics (3) (Flash memory version)  
(VCC = 2.7 to 5.5 V, Ta = –20 to 85 °C, f(XCIN)=32.768 kHz (Stopped in middle-speed mode),  
Output transistors “off”, AD converter not operated)  
Limits  
Symbol  
ICC  
Parameter  
Test conditions  
Unit  
mA  
Min.  
Typ.  
5.5  
Max.  
8.3  
6.8  
5.3  
3.3  
3.3  
4.1  
2.7  
1.7  
4.5  
3.6  
3.0  
3.2  
2.6  
2.3  
2.0  
630  
6.8  
600  
5.6  
3.0  
Power source High-speed  
current  
VCC = 5.0 V f(XIN) = 16.8 MHz  
f(XIN) = 12.5 MHz  
mode  
4.5  
f(XIN) = 8.4 MHz  
3.5  
f(XIN) = 4.2 MHz  
2.2  
f(XIN) = 16.8 MHz (in WIT state)  
2.2  
VCC = 3.0 V f(XIN) = 8.4 MHz  
f(XIN) = 4.2 MHz  
2.7  
mA  
mA  
1.8  
f(XIN) = 2.1 MHz  
1.1  
Middle-speed  
mode  
VCC = 5.0 V f(XIN) = 16.8 MHz  
f(XIN) = 12.5 MHz  
3.0  
2.4  
f(XIN) = 8.4 MHz  
2.0  
f(XIN) = 16.8 MHz (in WIT state)  
2.1  
VCC = 3.0 V f(XIN) = 12.5 MHz  
f(XIN) = 8.4 MHz  
1.7  
mA  
1.5  
f(XIN) = 6.3 MHz  
1.3  
Low-speed  
mode  
VCC = 5.0 V f(XIN) = stopped  
In WIT state  
410  
4.5  
µA  
µA  
µA  
µA  
VCC = 3.0 V f(XIN) = stopped  
In WIT state  
400  
3.7  
In STP state  
(All oscillation stopped)  
Ta = 25 °C  
Ta = 85 °C  
f(XIN) = 16.8 MHz, VCC = 5.0 V  
In Middle-, high-speed mode  
0.55  
0.75  
1000  
Increment when A/D  
conversion is executed  
Rev.1.00 Apr 2, 2007  
REJ03B0212-0100  
Page 108 of 117  
3803 Group (Spec.L)  
Mask ROM Version  
A/D converter characteristics  
Table 23 A/D converter recommended operating conditions (Mask ROM version)  
(VCC = 2.0 to 5.5 V, VSS = AVSS = 0 V, Ta = –20 to 85 °C, unless otherwise noted)  
Limits  
Symbol  
VCC  
Parameter  
Conditions  
Unit  
V
Min.  
2.0  
2.2  
2.0  
Typ.  
5.0  
Max.  
5.5  
8-bit A/D mode(1)  
10-bit A/D mode(2)  
Power source voltage  
(When A/D converter is used)  
5.0  
5.5  
VREF  
AVSS  
VIA  
Analog convert reference voltage  
Analog power source voltage  
Analog input voltage AN0-AN15  
VCC  
V
V
0
0
VCC  
V
f(XIN)  
Main clock input oscillation  
frequency  
(When A/D converter is used)  
2.0 VCC = VREF < 2.2 V  
2.2 VCC = VREF < 2.7 V  
2.7 VCC = VREF < 4.0 V  
4.0 VCC = VREF < 4.5 V  
4.5 VCC = VREF 5.5 V  
0.5  
MHz  
(20 × VCC 36) × 1.05  
-----------------------------------------------------------  
2
0.5  
0.5  
0.5  
0.5  
(24 × VCC 40.8) × 1.05  
----------------------------------------------------------------  
3
(9 × VCC 0.3) × 1.05  
---------------------------------------------------------  
3
(24.6 × VCC 62.7) × 1.05  
---------------------------------------------------------------------  
3
16.8  
NOTES:  
1. 8-bit A/D mode: When the conversion mode selection bit (bit 7 of address 003816) is “1”.  
2. 10-bit A/D mode: When the conversion mode selection bit (bit 7 of address 003816) is “0”.  
Table 24 A/D converter characteristics (Mask ROM version)  
(VCC = 2.0 to 5.5 V, VSS = AVSS = 0 V, Ta = –20 to 85 °C, unless otherwise noted)  
Limits  
Symbol  
Parameter  
Test conditions  
8-bit A/D mode(1)  
Unit  
bit  
Min.  
Typ. Max.  
Resolution  
8
10-bit A/D mode(2)  
8-bit A/D mode(1)  
10  
±3  
±2  
±5  
±4  
50  
61  
Absolute accuracy  
(excluding quantization error)  
2.0 VREF < 2.2 V  
2.2 VREF 5.5 V  
2.2 VREF < 2.7 V  
2.7 VREF 5.5 V  
LSB  
LSB  
10-bit A/D mode(2)  
8-bit A/D mode(1)  
10-bit A/D mode(2)  
tCONV  
Conversion time  
Ladder resistor  
2tc(XIN)  
RLADDER  
IVREF  
12  
50  
35  
100  
200  
5.0  
kΩ  
µA  
µA  
µA  
Reference power  
source input current  
at A/D converter operated VREF = 5.0 V  
150  
at A/D converter stopped VREF = 5.0 V  
II(AD)  
A/D port input current  
5.0  
NOTES:  
1. 8-bit A/D mode: When the conversion mode selection bit (bit 7 of address 003816) is “1”.  
2. 10-bit A/D mode: When the conversion mode selection bit (bit 7 of address 003816) is “0”.  
D/A converter characteristics  
Table 25 D/A converter characteristics (Mask ROM version)  
(VCC = 2.7 to 5.5 V, VREF = 2.7 V to VCC, VSS = AVSS = 0 V, Ta = –20 to 85 °C, unless otherwise noted)  
Limits  
Symbol  
Parameter  
Unit  
Min.  
Typ.  
3.5  
Max.  
8
Resolution  
bit  
%
Absolute accuracy  
4.0 VREF 5.5 V  
2.7 VREF < 4.0 V  
1.0  
2.5  
3
tsu  
Setting time  
µs  
kΩ  
mA  
RO  
Output resistor  
2
5
Reference power source input current(1)  
IVREF  
3.2  
NOTE:  
1. Using one D/A converter, with the value in the DA conversion register of the other D/A converter being “0016”.  
Rev.1.00 Apr 2, 2007  
REJ03B0212-0100  
Page 109 of 117  
3803 Group (Spec.L)  
A/D converter characteristics  
Table 26 A/D converter recommended operating conditions (Flash memory version)  
(VCC = 2.7 to 5.5 V, VSS = AVSS = 0 V, Ta = –20 to 85 °C, unless otherwise noted)  
Limits  
Symbol  
VCC  
Parameter  
Conditions  
Unit  
V
Min.  
2.7  
2.7  
2.0  
Typ.  
5.0  
Max.  
5.5  
8-bit A/D mode(1)  
10-bit A/D mode(2)  
Power source voltage  
(When A/D converter is used)  
5.0  
5.5  
VREF  
AVSS  
VIA  
Analog convert reference voltage  
Analog power source voltage  
Analog input voltage AN0-AN15  
VCC  
V
V
0
0
VCC  
V
f(XIN)  
Main clock input oscillation  
frequency  
(When A/D converter is used)  
2.7 VCC = VREF < 4.0 V  
4.0 VCC = VREF < 4.5 V  
4.5 VCC = VREF 5.5 V  
0.5  
MHz  
(9 × VCC 0.3) × 1.05  
---------------------------------------------------------  
3
0.5  
0.5  
(24.6 × VCC 62.7) × 1.05  
---------------------------------------------------------------------  
3
16.8  
NOTES:  
1. 8-bit A/D mode: When the conversion mode selection bit (bit 7 of address 003816) is “1”.  
2. 10-bit A/D mode: When the conversion mode selection bit (bit 7 of address 003816) is “0”.  
Table 27 A/D converter characteristics (Flash memory version)  
(VCC = 2.7 to 5.5 V, VSS = AVSS = 0 V, Ta = –20 to 85 °C, unless otherwise noted)  
Limits  
Symbol  
Parameter  
Test conditions  
8-bit A/D mode(1)  
Unit  
bit  
Min.  
Typ. Max.  
Resolution  
8
10-bit A/D mode(2)  
8-bit A/D mode(1)  
10-bit A/D mode(2)  
8-bit A/D mode(1)  
10-bit A/D mode(2)  
10  
±2  
±4  
50  
61  
Absolute accuracy  
(excluding quantization error)  
2.7 VREF 5.5 V  
2.7 VREF 5.5 V  
LSB  
LSB  
tCONV  
Conversion time  
2tc(XIN)  
RLADDER  
Ladder resistor  
12  
50  
35  
100  
200  
5.0  
kΩ  
µA  
µA  
µA  
IVREF  
Reference power  
source input current  
at A/D converter operated VREF = 5.0 V  
150  
at A/D converter stopped VREF = 5.0 V  
II(AD)  
A/D port input current  
5.0  
NOTES:  
1. 8-bit A/D mode: When the conversion mode selection bit (bit 7 of address 003816) is “1”.  
2. 10-bit A/D mode: When the conversion mode selection bit (bit 7 of address 003816) is “0”.  
D/A converter characteristics  
Table 28 D/A converter characteristics (Flash memory version)  
(VCC = 2.7 to 5.5 V, VREF = 2.7 V to VCC, VSS = AVSS = 0 V, Ta = –20 to 85 °C, unless otherwise noted)  
Limits  
Symbol  
Parameter  
Unit  
Min.  
Typ.  
3.5  
Max.  
8
Resolution  
bit  
%
Absolute accuracy  
4.0 VREF 5.5 V  
2.7 VREF < 4.0 V  
1.0  
2.5  
3
tsu  
Setting time  
µs  
kΩ  
mA  
RO  
Output resistor  
2
5
Reference power source input current(1)  
IVREF  
3.2  
NOTE:  
1. Using one D/A converter, with the value in the DA conversion register of the other D/A converter being “0016”.  
Table 29 Power source circuit timing characteristics (Flash memory version)  
(VCC = 2.7 to 5.5 V, VREF = 2.7 V to VCC, VSS = AVSS = 0 V, Ta = –20 to 85 °C, unless otherwise noted)  
Limits  
Symbol  
Parameter  
Test conditions  
Unit  
Min.  
2
Typ.  
Max.  
td(PR)  
Internal power source stable time 2.7 VCC < 5.5 V  
ms  
at power-on  
Rev.1.00 Apr 2, 2007  
REJ03B0212-0100  
Page 110 of 117  
3803 Group (Spec.L)  
Timing requirements and switching characteristics  
Table 30 Timing requirements (1)  
(Mask ROM version: VCC = 2.0 to 5.5 V, VSS = 0V, Ta = –20 to 85 °C, unless otherwise noted)  
(Flash memory version: VCC = 2.7 to 5.5 V, VSS = 0V, Ta = –20 to 85 °C, unless otherwise noted)  
Limits  
Symbol  
Parameter  
Reset input “L” pulse width  
Unit  
Min.  
Typ.  
Max.  
16  
XIN cycle  
ns  
tW(RESET)  
tC(XIN)  
Main clock XIN  
input cycle time  
4.5 VCC 5.5 V  
4.0 VCC < 4.5 V  
2.7 VCC < 4.0 V  
2.2 VCC < 2.7 V  
2.0 VCC < 2.2 V  
4.5 VCC 5.5 V  
4.0 VCC < 4.5 V  
2.7 VCC < 4.0 V  
2.2 VCC < 2.7 V  
2.0 VCC < 2.2 V  
4.5 VCC 5.5 V  
4.0 VCC < 4.5 V  
2.7 VCC < 4.0 V  
2.2 VCC < 2.7 V  
2.0 VCC < 2.2 V  
59.5  
10000/(86 VCC 219)  
26 × 103/(82 VCC 3)  
10000/(84 VCC 143)  
10000/(105 VCC 189)  
tWH(XIN)  
Main clock XIN  
input “H” pulse width  
25  
ns  
ns  
4000/(86 VCC 219)  
10000/(82 VCC 3)  
4000/(84 VCC 143)  
4000/(105 VCC 189)  
tWL(XIN)  
Main clock XIN  
input “L” pulse width  
25  
4000/(86 VCC 219)  
10000/(82 VCC 3)  
4000/(84 VCC 143)  
4000/(105 VCC 189)  
tC(XCIN)  
Sub-clock XCIN input cycle time  
20  
5
µs  
µs  
µs  
ns  
tWH(XCIN)  
tWL(XCIN)  
tC(CNTR)  
Sub-clock XCIN input “H” pulse width  
Sub-clock XCIN input “L” pulse width  
5
CNTR0CNTR2  
input cycle time  
4.5 VCC 5.5 V  
4.0 VCC < 4.5 V  
2.7 VCC < 4.0 V  
2.2 VCC < 2.7 V  
2.0 VCC < 2.2 V  
4.5 VCC 5.5 V  
4.0 VCC < 4.5 V  
2.7 VCC < 4.0 V  
2.2 VCC < 2.7 V  
2.0 VCC < 2.2 V  
4.5 VCC 5.5 V  
4.0 VCC < 4.5 V  
2.7 VCC < 4.0 V  
2.2 VCC < 2.7 V  
2.0 VCC < 2.2 V  
4.5 VCC 5.5 V  
4.0 VCC < 4.5 V  
2.7 VCC < 4.0 V  
2.2 VCC < 2.7 V  
2.0 VCC < 2.2 V  
4.5 VCC 5.5 V  
4.0 VCC < 4.5 V  
2.7 VCC < 4.0 V  
2.2 VCC < 2.7 V  
2.0 VCC < 2.2 V  
120  
160  
250  
500  
1000  
48  
tWH(CNTR)  
tWL(CNTR)  
tWH(INT)  
CNTR0CNTR2  
input “H” pulse width  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
64  
115  
230  
460  
48  
CNTR0CNTR2  
input “L” pulse width  
64  
115  
230  
460  
48  
INT00, INT01, INT1, INT2,  
INT3, INT40, INT41  
input “H” pulse width  
64  
115  
230  
460  
48  
tWL(INT)  
INT00, INT01, INT1, INT2,  
INT3, INT40, INT41  
input “L” pulse width  
64  
115  
230  
460  
Rev.1.00 Apr 2, 2007  
REJ03B0212-0100  
Page 111 of 117  
3803 Group (Spec.L)  
Table 31 Timing requirements (2)  
(Mask ROM version: VCC = 2.0 to 5.5 V, VSS = 0 V, Ta = 20 to 85 °C, unless otherwise noted)  
(Flash memory version: VCC = 2.7 to 5.5 V, VSS = 0 V, Ta = 20 to 85 °C, unless otherwise noted)  
Limits  
Symbol  
Parameter  
Unit  
ns  
Min.  
250  
320  
500  
1000  
2000  
120  
150  
240  
480  
950  
120  
150  
240  
480  
950  
70  
Typ. Max.  
tC(SCLK1)  
tC(SCLK3)  
Serial I/O1, serial I/O3  
clock input cycle time(1)  
4.5 VCC 5.5 V  
4.0 VCC < 4.5 V  
2.7 VCC < 4.0 V  
2.2 VCC < 2.7 V  
2.0 VCC < 2.2 V  
4.5 VCC 5.5 V  
4.0 VCC < 4.5 V  
2.7 VCC < 4.0 V  
2.2 VCC < 2.7 V  
2.0 VCC < 2.2 V  
4.5 VCC 5.5 V  
4.0 VCC < 4.5 V  
2.7 VCC < 4.0 V  
2.2 VCC < 2.7 V  
2.0 VCC < 2.2 V  
4.5 VCC 5.5 V  
4.0 VCC < 4.5 V  
2.7 VCC < 4.0 V  
2.2 VCC < 2.7 V  
2.0 VCC < 2.2 V  
4.5 VCC 5.5 V  
4.0 VCC < 4.5 V  
2.7 VCC < 4.0 V  
2.2 VCC < 2.7 V  
2.0 VCC < 2.2 V  
4.5 VCC 5.5 V  
4.0 VCC < 4.5 V  
2.7 VCC < 4.0 V  
2.2 VCC < 2.7 V  
2.0 VCC < 2.2 V  
4.5 VCC 5.5 V  
4.0 VCC < 4.5 V  
2.7 VCC < 4.0 V  
2.2 VCC < 2.7 V  
2.0 VCC < 2.2 V  
4.5 VCC 5.5 V  
4.0 VCC < 4.5 V  
2.7 VCC < 4.0 V  
2.2 VCC < 2.7 V  
2.0 VCC < 2.2 V  
4.5 VCC 5.5 V  
4.0 VCC < 4.5 V  
2.7 VCC < 4.0 V  
2.2 VCC < 2.7 V  
2.0 VCC < 2.2 V  
4.5 VCC 5.5 V  
4.0 VCC < 4.5 V  
2.7 VCC < 4.0 V  
2.2 VCC < 2.7 V  
2.0 VCC < 2.2 V  
tWH(SCLK1)  
tWH(SCLK3)  
Serial I/O1, serial I/O3  
clock input “H” pulse width(1)  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
tWL(SCLK1)  
tWL(SCLK3)  
Serial I/O1, serial I/O3  
clock input “L” pulse width(1)  
tsu(RxD1-SCLK1)  
tsu(RxD3-SCLK3)  
Serial I/O1, serial I/O3  
clock input setup time  
90  
100  
200  
400  
32  
th(SCLK1-RxD1)  
th(SCLK3-RxD3)  
Serial I/O1, serial I/O3  
clock input hold time  
40  
50  
100  
200  
500  
650  
1000  
2000  
4000  
200  
260  
400  
950  
2000  
200  
260  
400  
950  
2000  
100  
130  
200  
400  
800  
100  
130  
150  
300  
600  
tC(SCLK2)  
Serial I/O2  
clock input cycle time  
tWH(SCLK2)  
tWL(SCLK2)  
tsu(SIN2-SCLK2)  
th(SCLK2-SIN2)  
NOTE:  
Serial I/O2  
clock input “H” pulse width  
Serial I/O2  
clock input “L” pulse width  
Serial I/O2  
clock input setup time  
Serial I/O2  
clock input hold time  
1. When bit 6 of address 001A16 and bit 6 of address 003216 are “1” (clock synchronous).  
Divide this value by four when bit 6 of address 001A16 and bit 6 of address 003216 are “0” (UART).  
Rev.1.00 Apr 2, 2007  
REJ03B0212-0100  
Page 112 of 117  
3803 Group (Spec.L)  
Table 32 Switching characteristics (1)  
(Mask ROM version: VCC = 2.0 to 5.5 V, VSS = 0 V, Ta = 20 to 85 °C, unless otherwise noted)  
(Flash memory version: VCC = 2.7 to 5.5 V, VSS = 0 V, Ta = 20 to 85 °C, unless otherwise noted)  
Limits  
Test  
conditions  
Symbol  
Parameter  
Serial I/O1, serial I/O3  
Unit  
ns  
Min.  
Typ. Max.  
tWH(SCLK1)  
tWH(SCLK3)  
4.5 VCC 5.5 V  
4.0 VCC < 4.5 V  
2.7 VCC < 4.0 V  
2.2 VCC < 2.7 V  
2.0 VCC < 2.2 V  
4.5 VCC 5.5 V  
4.0 VCC < 4.5 V  
2.7 VCC < 4.0 V  
2.2 VCC < 2.7 V  
2.0 VCC < 2.2 V  
4.5 VCC 5.5 V  
4.0 VCC < 4.5 V  
2.7 VCC < 4.0 V  
2.2 VCC < 2.7 V  
2.0 VCC < 2.2 V  
4.5 VCC 5.5 V  
4.0 VCC < 4.5 V  
2.7 VCC < 4.0 V  
2.2 VCC < 2.7 V  
2.0 VCC < 2.2 V  
4.5 VCC 5.5 V  
4.0 VCC < 4.5 V  
2.7 VCC < 4.0 V  
2.2 VCC < 2.7 V  
2.0 VCC < 2.2 V  
4.5 VCC 5.5 V  
4.0 VCC < 4.5 V  
2.7 VCC < 4.0 V  
2.2 VCC < 2.7 V  
2.0 VCC < 2.2 V  
4.5 VCC 5.5 V  
4.0 VCC < 4.5 V  
2.7 VCC < 4.0 V  
2.2 VCC < 2.7 V  
2.0 VCC < 2.2 V  
4.5 VCC 5.5 V  
4.0 VCC < 4.5 V  
2.7 VCC < 4.0 V  
2.2 VCC < 2.7 V  
2.0 VCC < 2.2 V  
4.5 VCC 5.5 V  
4.0 VCC < 4.5 V  
2.7 VCC < 4.0 V  
2.2 VCC < 2.7 V  
2.0 VCC < 2.2 V  
4.5 VCC 5.5 V  
4.0 VCC < 4.5 V  
2.7 VCC < 4.0 V  
2.2 VCC < 2.7 V  
2.0 VCC < 2.2 V  
tC(SCLK1)/2-30, tC(SCLK3)/2-30  
tC(SCLK1)/2-35, tC(SCLK3)/2-35  
tC(SCLK1)/2-40, tC(SCLK3)/2-40  
tC(SCLK1)/2-45, tC(SCLK3)/2-45  
tC(SCLK1)/2-50, tC(SCLK3)/2-50  
tC(SCLK1)/2-30, tC(SCLK3)/2-30  
tC(SCLK1)/2-35, tC(SCLK3)/2-35  
tC(SCLK1)/2-40, tC(SCLK3)/2-40  
tC(SCLK1)/2-45, tC(SCLK3)/2-45  
tC(SCLK1)/2-50, tC(SCLK3)/2-50  
clock output “H” pulse  
width  
tWL(SCLK1)  
tWL(SCLK3)  
Serial I/O1, serial I/O3  
clock output “L” pulse  
width  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
td(SCLK1-TxD1) Serial I/O1, serial I/O3  
td(SCLK3-TxD3)  
140  
200  
350  
400  
420  
output delay time(1)  
tV(SCLK1-TxD1) Serial I/O1, serial I/O3  
tV(SCLK3-TxD3)  
30  
30  
30  
30  
30  
output valid time(1)  
tr(SCLK1)  
tr(SCLK3)  
Serial I/O1, serial I/O3  
rise time of clock  
output  
30  
35  
40  
45  
50  
30  
35  
40  
45  
50  
Fig.100  
tf(SCLK1)  
tf(SCLK3)  
Serial I/O1, serial I/O3  
fall time of clock output  
tWH(SCLK2)  
Serial I/O2  
clock output “H” pulse  
width  
tC(SCLK2)/2-160  
tC(SCLK2)/2-200  
tC(SCLK2)/2-240  
tC(SCLK2)/2-260  
tC(SCLK2)/2-280  
tC(SCLK2)/2-160  
tC(SCLK2)/2-200  
tC(SCLK2)/2-240  
tC(SCLK2)/2-260  
tC(SCLK2)/2-280  
tWL(SCLK2)  
Serial I/O2  
clock output “L” pulse  
width  
td(SCLK2-SOUT2) Serial I/O2  
output delay time  
200  
250  
300  
350  
400  
t
V
(SCLK2-SOUT2  
)
Serial I/O2  
output valid time  
0
0
0
0
0
NOTE:  
1. When the P45/TXD1 P-channel output disable bit of the UART1 control register (bit 4 of address 001B16) is “0”.  
Rev.1.00 Apr 2, 2007  
REJ03B0212-0100  
Page 113 of 117  
3803 Group (Spec.L)  
Table 33 Switching characteristics (2)  
(Mask ROM version: VCC = 2.0 to 5.5 V, VSS = 0 V, Ta = 20 to 85 °C, unless otherwise noted)  
(Flash memory version: VCC = 2.7 to 5.5 V, VSS = 0 V, Ta = 20 to 85 °C, unless otherwise noted)  
Limits  
Test  
conditions  
Symbol  
Parameter  
Unit  
ns  
Min.  
Typ. Max.  
tf(SCLK2)  
Serial I/O2  
4.5 VCC 5.5 V  
4.0 VCC < 4.5 V  
2.7 VCC < 4.0 V  
2.2 VCC < 2.7 V  
2.0 VCC < 2.2 V  
4.5 VCC 5.5 V  
4.0 VCC < 4.5 V  
30  
35  
40  
45  
50  
fall time of clock output  
tr(CMOS)  
tf(CMOS)  
NOTE:  
CMOS  
10  
12  
15  
17  
20  
10  
12  
15  
17  
20  
30  
35  
40  
45  
50  
30  
35  
40  
45  
50  
ns  
ns  
rise time of output(1)  
2.7 VCC < 4.0 V Fig.100  
2.2 VCC < 2.7 V  
2.0 VCC < 2.2 V  
4.5 VCC 5.5 V  
4.0 VCC < 4.5 V  
2.7 VCC < 4.0 V  
2.2 VCC < 2.7 V  
2.0 VCC < 2.2 V  
CMOS  
fall time of output(1)  
1. When the P35/TXD3 P4-channel output disable bit of the UART3 control register (bit 4 of address 003316) is “0”.  
1kΩ  
Measurement output pin  
Measurement output pin  
100 pF  
100 pF  
N-channel open-drain output  
CMOS output  
Fig 100. Circuit for measuring output switching characteristics  
Rev.1.00 Apr 2, 2007  
REJ03B0212-0100  
Page 114 of 117  
3803 Group (Spec.L)  
Single-chip mode timing diagram  
tC(CNTR)  
tWL(CNTR)  
tWH(CNTR)  
CNTR0, CNTR1  
CNTR2  
0.8VCC  
0.2VCC  
0.2VCC  
INT1, INT2, INT3  
INT00, INT40  
tWH(INT)  
tWL(INT)  
0.8VCC  
INT01, INT41  
tW(RESET)  
0.8VCC  
RESET  
0.2VCC  
tC(XIN)  
tWL(XIN)  
tWH(XIN)  
0.8VCC  
XIN  
0.2VCC  
tC(XCIN)  
tWL(XCIN)  
tWH(XCIN)  
0.8VCC  
XCIN  
0.2VCC  
tC(SCLK1), tC(SCLK2), tC(SCLK3)  
tWL(SCLK1), tWL(SCLK2), tWL(SCLK3)  
tWH(SCLK1), tWH(SCLK2), tWH(SCLK3)  
0.8VCC  
tf  
tr  
SCLK1  
SCLK2  
SCLK3  
0.2VCC  
tsu(RXD1-SCLK1),  
tsu(SIN2-SCLK2),  
tsu(RXD3-SCLK3)  
th(SCLK1-RXD1),  
th(SCLK2-SIN2),  
th(SCLK3-RXD3)  
RXD1  
RXD3  
SIN2  
0.8VCC  
0.2VCC  
tv(SCLK1-TXD1),  
tv(SCLK2-SOUT2),  
tv(SCLK3-TXD3)  
td(SCLK1-TXD1), td(SCLK2-SOUT2), td(SCLK3-TXD3)  
TXD1  
TXD3  
SOUT2  
Fig 101. Timing diagram (in single-chip mode)  
Rev.1.00 Apr 2, 2007  
REJ03B0212-0100  
Page 115 of 117  
3803 Group (Spec.L)  
PACKAGE OUTLINE  
Diagrams showing the latest package dimensions and mounting information are available in the “Packages” section of  
the Renesas Technology website.  
JEITA Package Code  
RENESAS Code  
PRDP0064BA-A  
Previous Code  
64P4B  
MASS[Typ.]  
7.9g  
P-SDIP64-17x56.4-1.78  
64  
33  
NOTE)  
1
32  
1. DIMENSIONS "*1" AND "*2"  
DO NOT INCLUDE MOLD FLASH.  
2. DIMENSION "*3" DOES NOT  
INCLUDE TRIM OFFSET.  
*2  
D
Dimension in Millimeters  
Reference  
Symbol  
Min Nom Max  
e1  
D
18.75 19.05 19.35  
56.2 56.4 56.6  
SEATING PLANE  
*3  
*3  
bp  
b3  
b2  
e
E
17.0  
16.85  
17.15  
5.08  
A
A1  
A2  
bp  
b2  
b3  
c
0.38  
3.8  
0.4 0.5 0.6  
0.65 0.75 1.05  
0.9 1.0 1.3  
0.2 0.25 0.32  
0°  
15°  
e
L
1.528 1.778 2.028  
2.8  
JEITA Package Code  
P-LQFP64-10x10-0.50  
RENESAS Code  
PLQP0064KB-A  
Previous Code  
64P6Q-A / FP-64K / FP-64KV  
MASS[Typ.]  
0.3g  
HD  
D
*1  
48  
33  
NOTE)  
1. DIMENSIONS "*1" AND "*2"  
DO NOT INCLUDE MOLD FLASH.  
2. DIMENSION "*3" DOES NOT  
INCLUDE TRIM OFFSET.  
49  
32  
bp  
b1  
Dimension in Millimeters  
Reference  
Symbol  
Min Nom Max  
D
E
10.0 10.1  
10.0 10.1  
1.4  
9.9  
9.9  
64  
17  
Terminal cross section  
A2  
HD  
HE  
A
11.8 12.0 12.2  
11.8 12.0 12.2  
1.7  
1
16  
Index mark  
ZD  
A1  
bp  
b1  
c
0.05  
0.15  
0.1  
0.15 0.20 0.25  
0.18  
F
0.09  
0.20  
c
0.145  
0.125  
c1  
0°  
8°  
y
e
0.5  
*3  
L
bp  
e
x
0.08  
0.08  
x
L1  
y
Detail F  
ZD  
ZE  
L
1.25  
1.25  
0.5  
0.35  
0.65  
L1  
1.0  
Rev.1.00 Apr 2, 2007  
REJ03B0212-0100  
Page 116 of 117  
3803 Group (Spec.L)  
JEITA Package Code  
P-LQFP64-14x14-0.80  
RENESAS Code  
PLQP0064GA-A  
Previous Code  
64P6U-A  
MASS[Typ.]  
0.7g  
HD  
*1  
D
33  
48  
NOTE)  
1. DIMENSIONS "*1" AND "*2"  
DO NOT INCLUDE MOLD FLASH.  
2. DIMENSION "*3" DOES NOT  
INCLUDE TRIM OFFSET.  
49  
32  
bp  
b1  
Dimension in Millimeters  
Reference  
Symbol  
Min Nom Max  
Terminal cross section  
D
E
13.9 14.0 14.1  
13.9 14.0 14.1  
1.4  
A2  
HD  
HE  
A
15.8 16.0 16.2  
15.8 16.0 16.2  
1.7  
64  
17  
A1  
bp  
b1  
c
0.1 0.2  
0
1
16  
ZD  
0.32 0.37 0.42  
0.35  
Index mark  
c
F
0.145  
0.125  
0.09  
0.20  
c1  
L
L1  
0°  
8°  
e
x
0.8  
y
Detail F  
0.20  
0.10  
*3  
e
bp  
y
x
ZD  
ZE  
L
1.0  
1.0  
0.3 0.5 0.7  
1.0  
L1  
JEITA Package Code  
P-TFLGA64-6x6-0.65  
RENESAS Code  
PTLG0064JA-A  
Previous Code  
64F0G  
MASS[Typ.]  
0.07g  
b1  
S
e
AB  
b
D
S
AB  
w
S A  
A
H
G
F
E
D
C
B
A
Dimension in Millimeters  
Reference  
Symbol  
y
S
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
x4  
Min Nom Max  
6.0  
6.0  
v
D
E
v
Index mark  
Index mark  
(Laser mark)  
0.15  
w
A
e
0.20  
1.05  
0.65  
b
0.31 0.35 0.39  
0.39 0.43 0.47  
0.08  
b1  
x
y
0.10  
Rev.1.00 Apr 2, 2007  
REJ03B0212-0100  
Page 117 of 117  
REVISION HISTORY  
3803 Group (Spec.L) Data Sheet  
Rev.  
Date  
Description  
Summary  
Page  
1.00  
Apr.2, 2007  
First edition issued  
(1/1)  
Sales Strategic Planning Div. Nippon Bldg., 2-6-2, Ohte-machi, Chiyoda-ku, Tokyo 100-0004, Japan  
Notes:  
1. This document is provided for reference purposes only so that Renesas customers may select the appropriate Renesas products for their use. Renesas neither makes  
warranties or representations with respect to the accuracy or completeness of the information contained in this document nor grants any license to any intellectual property  
rights or any other rights of Renesas or any third party with respect to the information in this document.  
2. Renesas shall have no liability for damages or infringement of any intellectual property or other rights arising out of the use of any information in this document, including,  
but not limited to, product data, diagrams, charts, programs, algorithms, and application circuit examples.  
3. You should not use the products or the technology described in this document for the purpose of military applications such as the development of weapons of mass  
destruction or for the purpose of any other military use. When exporting the products or technology described herein, you should follow the applicable export control laws  
and regulations, and procedures required by such laws and regulations.  
4. All information included in this document such as product data, diagrams, charts, programs, algorithms, and application circuit examples, is current as of the date this  
document is issued. Such information, however, is subject to change without any prior notice. Before purchasing or using any Renesas products listed in this document,  
please confirm the latest product information with a Renesas sales office. Also, please pay regular and careful attention to additional and different information to be  
disclosed by Renesas such as that disclosed through our website. (http://www.renesas.com )  
5. Renesas has used reasonable care in compiling the information included in this document, but Renesas assumes no liability whatsoever for any damages incurred as a  
result of errors or omissions in the information included in this document.  
6. When using or otherwise relying on the information in this document, you should evaluate the information in light of the total system before deciding about the applicability  
of such information to the intended application. Renesas makes no representations, warranties or guaranties regarding the suitability of its products for any particular  
application and specifically disclaims any liability arising out of the application and use of the information in this document or Renesas products.  
7. With the exception of products specified by Renesas as suitable for automobile applications, Renesas products are not designed, manufactured or tested for applications  
or otherwise in systems the failure or malfunction of which may cause a direct threat to human life or create a risk of human injury or which require especially high quality  
and reliability such as safety systems, or equipment or systems for transportation and traffic, healthcare, combustion control, aerospace and aeronautics, nuclear power, or  
undersea communication transmission. If you are considering the use of our products for such purposes, please contact a Renesas sales office beforehand. Renesas shall  
have no liability for damages arising out of the uses set forth above.  
8. Notwithstanding the preceding paragraph, you should not use Renesas products for the purposes listed below:  
(1) artificial life support devices or systems  
(2) surgical implantations  
(3) healthcare intervention (e.g., excision, administration of medication, etc.)  
(4) any other purposes that pose a direct threat to human life  
Renesas shall have no liability for damages arising out of the uses set forth in the above and purchasers who elect to use Renesas products in any of the foregoing  
applications shall indemnify and hold harmless Renesas Technology Corp., its affiliated companies and their officers, directors, and employees against any and all  
damages arising out of such applications.  
9. You should use the products described herein within the range specified by Renesas, especially with respect to the maximum rating, operating supply voltage range,  
movement power voltage range, heat radiation characteristics, installation and other product characteristics. Renesas shall have no liability for malfunctions or damages  
arising out of the use of Renesas products beyond such specified ranges.  
10. Although Renesas endeavors to improve the quality and reliability of its products, IC products have specific characteristics such as the occurrence of failure at a certain  
rate and malfunctions under certain use conditions. Please be sure to implement safety measures to guard against the possibility of physical injury, and injury or damage  
caused by fire in the event of the failure of a Renesas product, such as safety design for hardware and software including but not limited to redundancy, fire control and  
malfunction prevention, appropriate treatment for aging degradation or any other applicable measures. Among others, since the evaluation of microcomputer software  
alone is very difficult, please evaluate the safety of the final products or system manufactured by you.  
11. In case Renesas products listed in this document are detached from the products to which the Renesas products are attached or affixed, the risk of accident such as  
swallowing by infants and small children is very high. You should implement safety measures so that Renesas products may not be easily detached from your products.  
Renesas shall have no liability for damages arising out of such detachment.  
12. This document may not be reproduced or duplicated, in any form, in whole or in part, without prior written approval from Renesas.  
13. Please contact a Renesas sales office if you have any questions regarding the information contained in this document, Renesas semiconductor products, or if you have  
any other inquiries.  
RENESAS SALES OFFICES  
http://www.renesas.com  
Refer to "http://www.renesas.com/en/network" for the latest and detailed information.  
Renesas Technology America, Inc.  
450 Holger Way, San Jose, CA 95134-1368, U.S.A  
Tel: <1> (408) 382-7500, Fax: <1> (408) 382-7501  
Renesas Technology Europe Limited  
Dukes Meadow, Millboard Road, Bourne End, Buckinghamshire, SL8 5FH, U.K.  
Tel: <44> (1628) 585-100, Fax: <44> (1628) 585-900  
Renesas Technology (Shanghai) Co., Ltd.  
Unit 204, 205, AZIACenter, No.1233 Lujiazui Ring Rd, Pudong District, Shanghai, China 200120  
Tel: <86> (21) 5877-1818, Fax: <86> (21) 6887-7898  
Renesas Technology Hong Kong Ltd.  
7th Floor, North Tower, World Finance Centre, Harbour City, 1 Canton Road, Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong  
Tel: <852> 2265-6688, Fax: <852> 2730-6071  
Renesas Technology Taiwan Co., Ltd.  
10th Floor, No.99, Fushing North Road, Taipei, Taiwan  
Tel: <886> (2) 2715-2888, Fax: <886> (2) 2713-2999  
Renesas Technology Singapore Pte. Ltd.  
1 Harbour Front Avenue, #06-10, Keppel Bay Tower, Singapore 098632  
Tel: <65> 6213-0200, Fax: <65> 6278-8001  
Renesas Technology Korea Co., Ltd.  
Kukje Center Bldg. 18th Fl., 191, 2-ka, Hangang-ro, Yongsan-ku, Seoul 140-702, Korea  
Tel: <82> (2) 796-3115, Fax: <82> (2) 796-2145  
Renesas Technology Malaysia Sdn. Bhd  
Unit 906, Block B, Menara Amcorp, Amcorp Trade Centre, No.18, Jalan Persiaran Barat, 46050 Petaling Jaya, Selangor Darul Ehsan, Malaysia  
Tel: <603> 7955-9390, Fax: <603> 7955-9510  
© 2007. Renesas Technology Corp., All rights reserved. Printed in Japan.  
Colophon .7.0  

相关型号:

SI9130DB

5- and 3.3-V Step-Down Synchronous Converters

Warning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 217
-
VISHAY

SI9135LG-T1

SMBus Multi-Output Power-Supply Controller

Warning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 217
-
VISHAY

SI9135LG-T1-E3

SMBus Multi-Output Power-Supply Controller

Warning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 217
-
VISHAY

SI9135_11

SMBus Multi-Output Power-Supply Controller

Warning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 217
-
VISHAY

SI9136_11

Multi-Output Power-Supply Controller

Warning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 217
-
VISHAY

SI9130CG-T1-E3

Pin-Programmable Dual Controller - Portable PCs

Warning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 217
-
VISHAY

SI9130LG-T1-E3

Pin-Programmable Dual Controller - Portable PCs

Warning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 217
-
VISHAY

SI9130_11

Pin-Programmable Dual Controller - Portable PCs

Warning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 217
-
VISHAY

SI9137

Multi-Output, Sequence Selectable Power-Supply Controller for Mobile Applications

Warning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 217
-
VISHAY

SI9137DB

Multi-Output, Sequence Selectable Power-Supply Controller for Mobile Applications

Warning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 217
-
VISHAY

SI9137LG

Multi-Output, Sequence Selectable Power-Supply Controller for Mobile Applications

Warning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 217
-
VISHAY

SI9122E

500-kHz Half-Bridge DC/DC Controller with Integrated Secondary Synchronous Rectification Drivers

Warning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 217
-
VISHAY